en_tn/tn_ROM.tsv

1	Reference	ID	Tags	SupportReference	Quote	Occurrence	Note
2	front:intro	gtn1				0	Introduction to Romans Part 1: General Introduction Outline of the book of Romans Introduction (1:1–15) Main Theme: Righteousness is received by trusting in Jesus Christ (1:16–17) All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20) Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21) Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39) God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36) Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13) Conclusion (15:14–16:27) Who wrote the book of Romans? The Apostle Paul wrote the book of Romans and may other books in the New Testament. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was part of a strict Jewish religious group called the Pharisees. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus. Paul probably wrote this letter while he was staying in the city of Corinth during his third trip through the Roman Empire. What is the book of Romans about? Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Rome. Paul wanted to get them ready to receive him when he visited them. He said his purpose was to “bring about the obedience of faith” (16:26). In this letter Paul most fully described the gospel of Jesus Christ. He explained that both Jews and non-Jews have sinned, and God will forgive them and declare them righteous only if they believe in Jesus (chapters 1–11). Then he gave them practical advice for how believers should live (chapters 12–16), How should the title of this book be translated? Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Romans.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Rome,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Rome.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts What are the titles used to refer to Jesus? In Romans, Paul described Jesus Christ by many titles and descriptions: Jesus Christ (1:1), the Seed of David (1:3), the Son of God (1:4), the Lord Jesus Christ (1:7), Christ Jesus (3:24), Propitiation (3:25), Jesus (3:26), Jesus our Lord (4:24), Lord of Hosts (9:29), a Stumbling Stone and Rock of Offence (9:33), the End of the Law (10:4), the Deliverer (11:26), Lord of the Dead and the Living (14:9), and the Root of Jesse (15:12). How should theological terms in Romans be translated? Paul uses many theological terms that are not used in the four Gospels. As early Christians learned more about the meaning of Jesus Christ and his message, they needed words and expressions for new ideas. Some examples of these words are “justification” (5:1), “works of the law” (3:20), “reconcile” (5:10), “propitiation” (3:25), “sanctification” (6:19), and “the old man” (6:6). If your language doesn’t have similar words, you can develop short phrases to communicate these ideas. For example, the term “gospel” can be translated as “the good news about Jesus Christ.” Translators should also remember that some of these terms have more than one meaning. The meaning will depend on how the author is using the word in that particular passage. For example, “righteousness” sometimes means that a person obeys God’s law. At other times, “righteousness” means that Jesus Christ has perfectly obeyed God’s law for us. What did Paul mean by “a remnant” of Israel (11:5)? The idea of a “remnant” is important both in the Old Testament and for Paul. Most of the Israelites were either killed or scattered among other people when the Assyrians and then the Babylonians conquered their land. Only a relatively few Jews survived. They were known as “the remnant.” In 11:1–9, Paul speaks of another remnant. This remnant is the Jews whom God saved because they believed in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/remnant]]) Part 3: Important Translation Issues What did Paul mean by being “in Christ”? The phrase “in Christ” and similar phrases occur in 3:24; 6:11, 23; 8:1,2,39; 9:1; 12:5,17; 15:17; and 16:3,7,9,10. Paul used these kinds of phrases as a metaphor to express that Christian believers belong to Jesus Christ. Belonging to Christ means the believer is saved and is made a friend with God. The believer is also promised to live with God forever. However, this idea can be difficult to represent in many languages. These phrases also have specific meanings that depend on how Paul used them in a particular passage. For example, in 3:24 (“the redemption that is in Christ Jesus”), Paul referred to our being redeemed “because” of Jesus Christ. In 8:9 (“you are not in the flesh but in the Spirit”), Paul spoke of believers submitting “to” the Holy Spirit. In 9:1 (“I tell the truth in Christ”), Paul meant that he is telling the truth that “is in agreement with” Jesus Christ. Nevertheless, the basic idea of our being united with Jesus Christ (and with the Holy Spirit) is seen in these passages as well. Therefore, the translator has a choice in many passages that use “in.” He will often decide to represent the more immediate sense of “in,” such as, “by means of,” “in the manner of,” or “in regard to.” But, if possible, the translator should choose a word or phrase that represents the immediate sense and the sense of “in union with.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/inchrist]]) How are the ideas of “holy,” “saints” or “holy ones,” and “sanctify” represented in Romans in the ULT? The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles: Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless and faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones” or “holy people.” (See: 1:7) Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In cases where some other English versions have “saints” or “holy ones,” the ULT uses “believers.” (See: 8:27; 12:13; 15:25, 26, 31; 16:2, 15) Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “consecrated,” or “reserved for.” (See: 15:16) The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions. Singular and plural “you” In this book, the word “you” is almost always plural and refers to Paul’s audience. There are only four instances of singular “you,” three of which are quotations from the Old Testament (9:7, 17; 13:4, 15:9). Those exceptions will be addressed in the notes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) What are the major issues in the text of the book of Romans? For the following verses, modern version of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT includes the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. “he \[God\] works all things together for good” (8:28). Some older versions read, “All things work together for good.” “But if it is by grace, it is no longer by works. Otherwise grace would no longer be grace” (11:6). Some older versions read: “But if it is by works, then is it no more grace: otherwise work is no more work.” The following verse is not in the best ancient copies of the Bible. Translators are advised not to include this verse. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have this verse, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets (\[\]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the book of Romans. “May the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with you all. Amen” (16:24). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3	1:intro	hn5n				0	Romans 1 General Notes Structure and formatting Introduction (1:1–15) Greeting (1:1–7) Paul plans to visit Rome (1:8–15) Main Theme: Righteousness is received by having faith in Jesus Christ (1:16–17) All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20) All non-Jews have sinned (1:18–32) Special concepts in this chapter The gospel This chapter refers to the contents of the Book of Romans as “the gospel” (1:2). Romans is not a Gospel like Matthew, Mark, Luke, or John, which are historical accounts of the life of Jesus. Instead, chapters 1–8 present the biblical gospel, which is the good news of salvation. The gospel contains the following true ideas: Everyone has sinned. Jesus died for our sins. Jesus came back to life again so that we might live for his glory and receive eternal life when we die. Universal Condemnation and the Wrath of God In this chapter Paul explains that no one has an excuse for sinning. We all know about the true God, Yahweh, from his creation all around us. Because of our sin and our sinful nature, every person justly deserves the eternal punishment of God. The requirement for this punishment was satisfied by Jesus dying on a cross for those who believe in him. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) Important figures of speech in this chapter “God gave them over” Many scholars view the phrases “God gave them over” and “God gave them up” as theologically significant. For this reason, it is important to translate these phrases with God playing a passive role in the action. God allows men to pursue their own sinful desires, he does not force them to act sinfully. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4	1:1	x3em		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	Παῦλος	1	In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “From Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
5	1:1	plvo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Παῦλος	1	Paul is the name of a man, an apostle of Jesus. See the information about him in Part 1 of the Introduction to Romans. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6	1:1	e417		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	δοῦλος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ, κλητὸς ἀπόστολος	1	These two phrases give further information about Paul. He describes himself as being someone given the position and authority of being Christ’s servant and apostle. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
7	1:1	v5b9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κλητὸς ἀπόστολος, ἀφωρισμένος	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Jesus called to be an apostle and set apart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8	1:1	ukts		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ	1	Here, for introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Jesusset him apart. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to preach the gospel of God” or “so that I could announce the good news from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
9	1:1	ji90		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gospel that comes from God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the gospel from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
10	1:2	cu3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ὃ	1	Here, which marks that further information is going to be given about “the gospel of God” in the previous verse. Paul is emphasizing that “the gospel of God” has its origin in the holy Scriptures that also come from God. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “that is, the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
11	1:3	lab1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	περὶ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	This phrase gives us further information about “the gospel of God.” Paul means that the message of God’s promised good news is about God’s Son, “Christ Jesus” (See verse 1). If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the gospel about his Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
12	1:3	lk5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Son is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
13	1:3	y2uy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῦ γενομένου ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυεὶδ	1	Here, from a seed of David is an idiom meaning “David’s descendant.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who was born a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
14	1:3	rj9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	Here, according to the flesh is an idiom meaning “with reference to physical descent.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “according to natural descent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
15	1:4	nhz7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τοῦ ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν δυνάμει κατὰ Πνεῦμα ἁγιωσύνης ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	In this verse, Paul places these phrases in the order he wants to emphasize. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
16	1:4	at5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦ ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “whom God designated as the Son of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
17	1:4	cp80		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
18	1:4	h32u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν δυνάμει	1	Here, in power could refer to: (1) the means by which God designated Jesus as the Son of God. Alternate translation: “who was designated the Son of God by means of power” (2) a new level of power God gave to the Son of God. Alternate translation: “who was designated as the powerful Son of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
19	1:4	m89w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	Πνεῦμα ἁγιωσύνης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe God’s Spirit that is characterized by holiness. This refers to the Holy Spirit. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an alternate expression, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
20	1:4	js9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of resurrection, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “by being resurrected from the dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
21	1:4	h97z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	νεκρῶν	1	Here, the phrase translated of dead ones refers to dead people. Here it means that Jesus physically died and was buried. If your language has a word or phrase for the place that dead people go, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “from the place where dead people are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
22	1:4	zvql		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	νεκρῶν	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the place from where Jesus was resurrected. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the preposition “from” instead of “of.” Alternate translation: “from death” or “from among the dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
23	1:4	brej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	Here, our refers to all Christians, so it is inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
24	1:5	ww9a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ οὗ	1	Here, whom refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
25	1:5	jr9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δι’ οὗ ἐλάβομεν χάριν καὶ ἀποστολὴν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace and apostleship, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he who acted kindly toward us and made us his apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
26	1:5	mosg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐλάβομεν	1	Here, we is exclusive and your language may require you to mark this form. It could refer to: (1) Paul and other apostles, as in the UST. (2) Paul speaking about himself in a plural form. Alternate translation: “I received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
27	1:5	mv5n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς	1	Here, for introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Jesus made Paul and other people his apostles. Use a natural way in your language introduce a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
28	1:5	krzj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of obedience and faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for people to faithfully obey Jesus among all the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
29	1:5	cf3g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως	1	Here, obedience of faith could refer to: (1) obedience that is characterized by trust in God. Alternate translation: “for obedience by trusting in God” or “obedience that comes from trusting in God” (2) obedience that results from trusting in God. Alternate translation: “faith that results in obedience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
30	1:5	eem9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	Here, the Gentiles could refer to: (1) the nations. Use this interpretation if you interpreted we to refer to all the apostles and retained it in your translation. Alternate translation: “among all people groups” (2) non-Jewish people groups. Use this interpretation if you interpreted we to refer only to Paul and translated it as “I”. Alternate translation: “among all non-Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
31	1:5	rd3v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἐλάβομεν χάριν καὶ ἀποστολὴν εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “we received grace and apostleship for the sake of his name, for obedience of the faith among all the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
32	1:5	sxc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul uses name figuratively. It could refer to: (1) Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Jesus” (2) Jesus’ reputation. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Jesus’ fame” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
33	1:6	xurz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν οἷς	1	Here,whom refers to “the Gentiles” who were mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated “the Gentiles” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “among the nations” or “among the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
34	1:6	sks2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὑμεῖς	1	In this letter, with four exceptions, the words you and your are plural and refer to the recipients of this letter, who are members of the church at Rome (See 1:7). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers in Christ at Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
35	1:6	qq9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	κλητοὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe called ones who were called by Jesus Christ. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “ones called by Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
36	1:7	z85a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	πᾶσιν τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ῥώμῃ	1	In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would then say to whom they were writing, and they would name those people in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “To all of you who are in Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
37	1:7	ymaj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ῥώμῃ	1	Rome is the name of a city, the capital city of the Roman Empire. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
38	1:7	zfwq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἀγαπητοῖς Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the adjective beloved as a noun in order to describe the church at Rome. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this words with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are loved of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
39	1:7	rkdh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἀγαπητοῖς Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the beloved who are loved by God. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “loved by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
40	1:7	v8bl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	In this culture, letter writers would offer a good wish for the recipient before introducing the main business of the letter. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing. Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
41	1:7	ys4e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns grace and peace with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ show his gracious acts to you and make you feel peaceful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
42	1:7	d8pa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Father here is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus and the relationship between God and believers. Alternate translation: “our Father God and the Lord Jesus, the Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
43	1:7	j61d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	Πατρὸς ἡμῶν	1	When Paul writes our here, he is speaking of himself and his readers, so our would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “who is the Father of us Christians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
44	1:8	yrau		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	πρῶτον μὲν εὐχαριστῶ τῷ Θεῷ μου διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν, ὅτι ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κόσμῳ.	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because your faith is being proclaimed throughout the whole world, I first want to thank my God through Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
45	1:8	totr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	πρῶτον μὲν	1	First here indicates that Paul has finished his introduction to the letter, and what follows is the beginning of the content of the letter. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The first thing I want to say is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
46	1:8	tdsj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῷ Θεῷ μου	1	Paul is using the possessive form my God to express that he belongs to God. Paul does not mean that he owns God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the God I belong to” or “the God that owns me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
47	1:8	bphf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way you trust in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
48	1:8	efqs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context indicates that other believers are proclaiming how great the faith of the Roman believers is. Alternate translation: “other people are proclaiming your faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
49	1:8	k7qf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κόσμῳ	1	Here, the whole world is an exaggeration that refers to all the parts of the world that were familiar to Paul and his readers, particularly the Roman Empire. Paul is not referring to every place on the planet. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “across the known world” or “wherever the Roman Empire is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
50	1:9	c7pa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	For indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul could say in the previous verse that he thanks God for the Roman believers. If it would be helpful to you readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You can be sure this is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
51	1:9	twht		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	μάρτυς & μού ἐστιν ὁ Θεός, ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὡς ἀδιαλείπτως μνείαν ὑμῶν ποιοῦμαι	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses and make a new sentence if necessary. Alternate translation: “God is my witness how I continually make mention of you. I serve him in my spirit in the gospel of his Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
52	1:9	dx6p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	μάρτυς & μού & ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	This phrase gives us further information about God. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my witness and I serve him in my spirit in the gospel of his Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
53	1:9	ll1e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μάρτυς & μού	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of witness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the one who testifies about me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
54	1:9	ydnc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου	1	Here, spirit refers to the inner person, which is what a person thinks and feels. Paul means that he serves God with complete devotion. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “with my whole heart” or “wholeheartedly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
55	1:9	ih0v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ	1	Here, in indicates the means by which Paul served God and gospel refers specifically to proclaiming the gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by proclaiming the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
56	1:9	o66d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gospel that is about God’s Son. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the gospel about his Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
57	1:9	r2l5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱοῦ	1	Son is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
58	1:9	f9p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἀδιαλείπτως	1	Here, continually is an exaggeration that emphasizes how frequently Paul prayed for the church at Rome. Paul does not mean that he spends all of his time praying for them. If your language would not use exaggeration in this way, use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I regularly” or “I habitually” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole)
59	1:9	vtuq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	μνείαν ὑμῶν ποιοῦμαι	1	Here, making mention is an idiom for prayer. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I am … praying for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
60	1:10	mdc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	πάντοτε ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν μου, δεόμενος	1	This phrase means the same thing as “I continually make mention of you” in the previous verse. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how intensely he prays that God will allow him to visit the church at Rome. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase for the similar passage in the previous verse and in this verse provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “in all my prayers, I beg God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
61	1:10	oi0x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντοτε	1	Here, the word always is an exaggeration that figuratively express the frequency of Paul’s prayers to God for the church at Rome. Paul does not mean that he spends all of his time praying for them. If your language would not use exaggeration in this way, use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “frequently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
62	1:10	b5wy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῷ θελήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of will, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because God wills for me” or “because God wants me”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
63	1:11	ki6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that this is a reason clause. Paul is indicating why he constantly prays to visit the church at Rome in verses 9–10. Use a natural way in your language to express the reason for something. Alternate translation: “I am always requesting this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
64	1:11	gjdu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἰδεῖν ὑμᾶς	1	Paul uses see figuratively to describe not only seeing the Christians in Rome, but also visiting them and spending time with them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to visit you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
65	1:11	b23b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, so that indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why he wants to visit the believers at Rome. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
66	1:12	pnnm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τοῦτο δέ ἐστιν	1	Here, and that is gives us further information about why Paul wants to share “some spiritual gift” with the church at Rome. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “namely” or “specifically” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
67	1:12	ux1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνπαρακληθῆναι ἐν ὑμῖν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to mutually encourage each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
68	1:12	ddtm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διὰ τῆς ἐν ἀλλήλοις πίστεως, ὑμῶν τε καὶ ἐμοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to to refer to the trust in Jesus that both he and his readers shared. Paul means that they should mutually encourage each other because they have a mutual faith in Christ. If this is not clear in your language, you can state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “by both you and I sharing with one another how we trust in God” or “through talking about our common Christian faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
69	1:12	e6py		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	1	See how you translated this word in verse 5 (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
70	1:13	yi1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ θέλω δὲ ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν	1	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I definitely want you to be informed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
71	1:13	rwzn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀγνοεῖν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to not know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
72	1:13	u1cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Although the term brother is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
73	1:13	zvrj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἐκωλύθην ἄχρι τοῦ δεῦρο	1	Paul assumes that his readers will know that until now means “even at the present time.” He does not mean that he was no longer hindered at the moment he wrote these words. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “but I have been hindered and still am now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
74	1:13	b92o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκωλύθην	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God hindered me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
75	1:13	gnu7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἵνα τινὰ καρπὸν σχῶ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν	1	Here, fruit could refer to: (1) people believing in the gospel as a result of Paul’s preaching, which would connect this verse to the idea in verse 15. Alternative translation: “so that I might lead people to salvation among you also” (2) strengthening the believers in Rome, in which case this would have the same meaning as “some spiritual gracious gift” in verse 11. Alternative translation: “so that I might strengthen you also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
76	1:14	s4bm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὀφειλέτης εἰμί	1	Paul speaks figuratively of himself as if he was a debtor who owed money to people who were not Jews, such as Greeks and barbarians. Paul means that he was obligated to preach the gospel to non-Jews because God had commanded him to do so. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation, “I am obliged to preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
77	1:14	j2sz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	Ἕλλησίν τε καὶ βαρβάροις	1	Here Paul uses Greeks and barbarians figuratively to represent all the Gentiles referred to in the previous verse. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to all types of Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
78	1:14	lio6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	σοφοῖς τε καὶ ἀνοήτοις	1	Paul speaks figuratively here, using wise ones and foolish ones to represent all types of people among the Gentiles referred to in the previous verse. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to all types of people among the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
79	1:14	q728		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	Ἕλλησίν τε καὶ βαρβάροις, σοφοῖς τε καὶ ἀνοήτοις	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that he is obligated to preach the gospel to every kind of Gentile. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “to each and every kind of Gentile” or “to every single non-Jewish person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
80	1:15	h9zv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὕτως	1	So here indicates that this a reason clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why someone does something. Alternate translation: “This is the reason why” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
81	1:16	oa6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates the reason why Paul is eager to proclaim the gospel in Rome. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am eager to do this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
82	1:16	mm2f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ & ἐπαισχύνομαι	1	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I am greatly honored” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
83	1:16	nvkv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐ & ἐπαισχύνομαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	Here, gospel refers specifically to the preaching of the gospel that was mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am not ashamed to preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
84	1:16	f5x9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δύναμις γὰρ Θεοῦ ἐστιν εἰς σωτηρίαν	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gospel as the powerful way that God saves people. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for it is the powerful way that God saves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
85	1:16	sz5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς σωτηρίαν	1	Here, for indicates that salvation is the result of the gospel. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “that results in the salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
86	1:16	merb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς σωτηρίαν παντὶ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for saving everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
87	1:16	htqe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	παντὶ τῷ πιστεύοντι	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to everyone who believes that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
88	1:16	dwtm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι	1	Paul is speaking of Jewish people and Greek people in general, not of one particular Jew or Greek. If this might confuse your readers, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “both to the Jewish people first and to the Greek people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
89	1:16	u8on		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον	1	The phrase the Jew first means that the Jewish people were the first people to hear the gospel. Paul does not mean that the Jew is better or has a high status than the Greek. If this would confuse your readers, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “both to the Jews who first heard the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
90	1:16	al16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἕλληνι	1	Here, the Greek refers to non-Jewish people in general. It does not refer only to people from the country of Greece. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the non-Jew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
91	1:17	of98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows is the reason why the gospel is the power of God that leads to salvation, as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The gospel can save everyone who believes because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
92	1:17	wfsc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἀποκαλύπτεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it reveals the righteousness of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
93	1:17	h38h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἀποκαλύπτεται	1	Paul speaks figuratively about the righteousness of God as if it was an object that could be revealed. He means that people learn about the righteousness of God when someone proclaims the gospel to them. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “when people preach the gospel, those who hear it learn about the righteousness of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
94	1:17	qr31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul is using the possessive form of God that could refer to: (1) righteousness that comes from God. Alternate translation: “the righteousness from God” (2) righteousness that characterizes God. Alternate translation: “God’s righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
95	1:17	gsl5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun righteousness in another way. Alternate translation: “how God causes people to become righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
96	1:17	ii3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐτῷ	1	The pronoun it here refers to “the gospel” that was mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
97	1:17	jl9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκ πίστεως εἰς πίστιν	1	Here, from faith to faith describes how the righteousness of God is revealed. It is an idiom that could mean: (1) completely by faith alone. Alternate translation: “by faith from beginning to end” or “through faith from first to last” (2) by the faith that all believers share, like how the phrase “from sea to sea” means “from one sea to another sea.” Alternate translation: “from one person’s faith to another person’s faith” (3) by faith that leads to increasing faith. Alternate translation: “through faith for faith” or “from one degree of faith to another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
98	1:17	igg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	Here Paul uses just as it is written to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Habakkuk 2:4). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “just as it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
99	1:17	bgvh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the prophet Habakkuk. Alternate translation: “just as the prophet Habakkuk wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
100	1:17	oih2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὁ δὲ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1	In this sentence Paul quotes Habakkuk 2:4. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
101	1:17	a9y7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται	1	Here, live could refer to: (1) eternal life. Alternative translation: “will live eternally by faith” (2) the quality of one’s physical life. Alternative translation: “will truly live by faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
102	1:17	e7eu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	2	See how you translated this word in verse 5 (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
103	1:18	c69s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows is the reason why “the righteous one must live by faith,” as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The righteous one must live this way because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
104	1:18	r15v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀποκαλύπτεται & ὀργὴ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God is revealing his wrath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
105	1:18	wzy3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὀργὴ Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul uses wrath figuratively to refer to the outcome of God’s wrath, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God’s wrathful punishment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
106	1:18	kjen		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ἀσέβειαν καὶ ἀδικίαν ἀνθρώπων	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of ungodliness and unrighteousness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “against all the ungodly and unrighteous acts of men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
107	1:18	fz23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ἀσέβειαν καὶ ἀδικίαν ἀνθρώπων	1	Here, ungodliness and unrighteousness of men figuratively refer to the people who do ungodly and unrighteous things. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “against people who do any ungodly or unrighteous deeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
108	1:18	td8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of unrighteousness and truth, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “who, because they do not want to act righteously, keep holding back what is true about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
109	1:18	rztp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
110	1:18	g3qm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων	1	This phrase gives us further information about the nature of people, who are called ** men** in the previous phrase. It is not making a distinction between different kinds of men. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “these same people who in unrighteousness are holding back the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
111	1:18	k4ql		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων	1	Here Paul speaks of truth figuratively as though it were a person who could be restrained or held back. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “who in unrighteousness prevent the truth from being known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
112	1:19	jd85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ γνωστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that it is any person. Alternate translation: “what people can know about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
113	1:19	r6ef		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς & αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun them refers to the ungodly and unrighteous people mentioned in the previous verse. Unless, otherwise noted, them, “their”, and “they” refer to ungodly and unrighteous people throughout verses 19–32. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all these ungodly and unrighteous people … all these ungodly and unrighteous people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
114	1:20	fo6q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ & ἀόρατα αὐτοῦ & καθορᾶται; ἥ τε ἀΐδιος αὐτοῦ δύναμις καὶ θειότης	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of qualities, power, and nature, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what people cannot see about God, both how eternally powerful he is and who he is are clearly seen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
115	1:20	szu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καθορᾶται	1	Paul uses seen figurative to refer to perceiving something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “are clearly perceived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
116	1:20	abdl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθορᾶται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people can clearly see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
117	1:20	uvc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κόσμου	1	Paul uses the world figuratively to refer to the whole universe. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of all that God made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
118	1:20	dr8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς ποιήμασιν νοούμενα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which the things God has made understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
119	1:20	dxr6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτοὺς ἀναπολογήτους	1	So indicates that this is a result clause. Use the natural way in your language to express result. Alternate translation: “As a result, they are without excuse” or “This is why they are without excuse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
120	1:21	pgta		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γνόντες τὸν Θεὸν	1	Here Paul uses having known to imply that these people know about God or know that God exists. He does not mean that they know God personally. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having known about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
121	1:21	iasg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	οὐχ ὡς Θεὸν ἐδόξασαν ἢ ηὐχαρίστησαν	1	Here, not glorify him and nor give him thanks mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that ungodly people dishonor God. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “they thanklessly despise God” or “they completely disregard God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
122	1:21	c6v7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ηὐχαρίστησαν	1	Here Paul speaks of expressions of thanks figuratively as if they were something that could be given to a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “did they thank him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
123	1:21	dant		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐματαιώθησαν ἐν τοῖς διαλογισμοῖς αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐσκοτίσθη ἡ ἀσύνετος αὐτῶν καρδία	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how foolish these ungodly people became by refusing to honor God. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “they became completely senseless in the way they think” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
124	1:21	xm6i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐματαιώθησαν ἐν τοῖς διαλογισμοῖς αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they began to think futile things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
125	1:21	d2c0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐσκοτίσθη ἡ ἀσύνετος αὐτῶν καρδία	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of the heart as if it could mentally sense things or could become black in color. He also uses darkened figuratively to refer to someone losing the ability to understand something. He means that these people lack spiritual sensitivity and are unable to understand spiritual things. If your readers would not understand what a senseless heart or darkened mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “their heart became incapable of feeling or understanding spiritual things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
126	1:21	t4p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καρδία	1	Here Paul uses heart figuratively to refer a person’s inner being or mind. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “inner being” or “mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
127	1:21	sw8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	καρδία	1	The word heart is a singular noun that refers to the inner beings or minds of a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “inner beings” or “hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
128	1:22	ddr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἐμωράνθησαν	1	The phrase they became foolish is in contrast to what these unrighteous people claimed about themselves in the previous phrase. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but they became foolish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
129	1:22	ly68			ἐμωράνθησαν	1	Alternate translation: “they became fools” or “they acted like fools” or “they started acting like fools”
130	1:23	k9xu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	Here, and indicates that what follows describes what these ungodly and unrighteous people did after they “became foolish,” as stated in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “then they” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
131	1:23	x2wl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ ἤλλαξαν τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ ἐν ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος φθαρτοῦ ἀνθρώπου, καὶ πετεινῶν, καὶ τετραπόδων, καὶ ἑρπετῶν.	1	Paul uses exchanged figuratively to describe the actions of these ungodly people as if they were exchanging goods or money. Paul means that they stopped worshiping God and started worshiping idols that resembled these creatures. If your readers would not understand what exchanged means in this context, you could use an express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “then they stopped glorifying the imperishable God in order to worship images things that God created: perishable humans, birds, four-footed animals, and creeping things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
132	1:23	qb7f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ ἐν ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος φθαρτοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	The two phrases the glory of the imperishable God and a likeness of an image of perishable man mean the opposite thing. Paul says the opposite thing with similar phrases to emphasize the contrast between God and man. Use a natural way in your language to express a contrast that uses parallel ideas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
133	1:23	r14e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what glorifies the imperishable God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
134	1:23	u971		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the relationship between glory and the imperishable God. This phrase could refer to: (1) the glory that characterizes God. Alternate translation: “the glory that characterizes the imperishable God” (2) the glory that belongs to God. Alternate translation: “the glory that belongs only to the imperishable God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
135	1:23	rfez		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος	1	The words translated as likeness and image were used in the Greek translation of the Old Testament to refer to the same thing (Genesis 1:26). Here Paul is using the possessive form to indicate that image is an explanation of likeness. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “a likeness, that is, an image” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
136	1:23	osrt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ πετεινῶν, καὶ τετραπόδων, καὶ ἑρπετῶν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “and likenesses of birds, and likenesses of four-footed animals, and likenesses of creeping things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
137	1:23	rq7h			τετραπόδων	1	The phrase four-footed beasts refers to animals that walk on four feet. Use the most natural form to describe this kind of animal in your language. Alternate translation: “of quadrupeds” or “of four-legged beasts”
138	1:24	fvv6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	Therefore here introduces a result clause. Paul is stating the result of people rejecting the glory of God in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “This is why” or “Because of this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
139	1:24	ec9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν	1	Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if God were physically giving them to lusts. He means that God is allowing them to have what they desire. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “God permitted them to become controlled by the lusts of their hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
140	1:24	tlv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe lusts that come from their hearts. If this is not clear in your language, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the lusts that come from their hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
141	1:24	le2o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν	1	See how you translated “heart” in verse 21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
142	1:24	rkou		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν	1	This is a result clause. Paul is stating the result of people indulging in the lusts of their hearts. Use the natural way in your language to express result. Alternate translation: “resulting in uncleanness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
143	1:24	ze8i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of uncleanness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to become unclean” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
144	1:24	g0r4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν	1	Here Paul uses uncleanness figuratively to refer to sexual immorality as if it were something dirty. He means that these lustful people become spiritually impure as a result of doing sexually immoral acts. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “to become sexually immoral” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
145	1:24	puad		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι	1	Here, to dishonor could refer to: (1) the result of God giving the people over to their lusts. Alternate translation: “which results in them dishonoring” (2) the purpose for which God gave them over to their lusts. Alternate translation: “in order to dishonor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
146	1:24	a8pm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι τὰ σώματα αὐτῶν	1	In this clause Paul uses dishonor their bodies figuratively to refer to sexually immoral acts. This is a polite way of referring to a shameful act. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to commit sexually immoral acts” or “to indulging in sexually immoral activity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
147	1:25	dv6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἵτινες μετήλλαξαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ψεύδει	1	Paul uses exchanged figuratively to describe the actions of these ungodly people as if they were exchanging goods or money. Paul means that they stopped believing what is true about God and started believing in idols, which are false gods. If your readers would not understand what exchanged means in this context, you could use an express the meaning plainly. See how you translated exchanged in verse 23. Alternative translation, “these people refuse to trust what God says is true and accept what is false” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
148	1:25	koee		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ψεύδει	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of truth and lie, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is correct about God for what is incorrect” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
149	1:25	e9pj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe truth that is about God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “true” instead of the noun truth. Alternate translation: “the truth about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
150	1:25	bl7p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐσεβάσθησαν καὶ ἐλάτρευσαν	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that these people completely rejected worshiping the true God. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “wholeheartedly worshiped” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
151	1:25	x3t4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ κτίσει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of creation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what was created” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
152	1:25	xrsa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ὅς ἐστιν εὐλογητὸς εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας	1	This phrase gives us further information about the Creator. It is not making a distinction between God and the Creator. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “God who is blessed to eternity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
153	1:25	m8zg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing	ὅς ἐστιν εὐλογητὸς εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας	1	After naming the Creator, Paul adds a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may he be blessed to eternity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
154	1:25	v1ex		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	εὐλογητὸς	1	Paul is using the adjective blessed as a noun in order to describe the Creator. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the blessed one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
155	1:26	sk6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς	1	See how you translated this phrase in verse 24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
156	1:26	hw81		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πάθη ἀτιμίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe passions that are characterized by dishonor. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “dishonorable” instead of the noun “dishonor.” Alternate translation: “dishonorable passions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
157	1:26	lk73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πάθη ἀτιμίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of passions and dishonor, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “dishonor themselves by doing what they are passionate about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
158	1:26	j4ni		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	The word translated for introduces an explanation of passions of dishonor. This explanation begins after the word for and continues through the end of the next verse. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “That is,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
159	1:26	jqyi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μετήλλαξαν τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν εἰς τὴν παρὰ φύσιν	1	Paul uses exchanged figuratively to describe the actions of ungodly women as if they were exchanging goods or money. Paul means that they stopped doing natural sexual acts with men and started doing sexual acts with other women that are contrary to nature. If your readers would not understand what exchanged means in this context, you could use an express the meaning plainly. See how you translated exchanged in verses 23 and 25. Alternative translation, “stopped doing natural sexual acts with men and started doing unnatural sexual acts with women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
160	1:26	vs4a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν	1	Paul uses the natural use figuratively to refer to sexual activity between women and men. This is a polite way of referring to something that would be offensive in some cultures. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sexual activity with males” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
161	1:26	qvr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	τὴν παρὰ φύσιν	1	Paul uses contrary to nature figuratively to refer to sexual activity between women and other women. This is a polite way of referring to something immoral. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “sexual activity with females” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
162	1:27	ji3l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὁμοίως τε καὶ οἱ ἄρσενες	1	This phrase emphasizes that what follows is similar to 1:26. Alternate translation: “in the same way even the males” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
163	1:27	gn3f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀφέντες	1	Paul speaks figuratively of these men as if they were leaving their location to go to another one. He means that they are abandoning or rejecting the way God intended for people to do sexual acts. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “having abandoned” or “having rejected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
164	1:27	g3ja		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν τῆς θηλείας	1	See how you translated the natural use in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
165	1:27	qvi3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν τῆς θηλείας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the natural use that is associated with the female. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an alternative expression. Alternate translation: “the natural use associated with the female” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
166	1:27	pqpo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τῆς θηλείας	1	Paul is speaking of these females in general, not of one particular female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of females” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
167	1:27	yvm1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐξεκαύθησαν ἐν τῇ ὀρέξει αὐτῶν εἰς ἀλλήλους	1	Paul speaks figuratively of lust as if it were something that could burn like a fire. He means that their lust is out of control like a burning fire. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “passionately lusted after one another” or “intensely desired each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
168	1:27	ylj6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξεκαύθησαν ἐν τῇ ὀρέξει αὐτῶν εἰς ἀλλήλους	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of lust, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “burned lustfully for one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
169	1:27	kxwj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἄρσενες ἐν ἄρσεσιν τὴν ἀσχημοσύνην κατεργαζόμενοι	1	This phrase refers to men doing sexual acts with other men. This is a polite way of referring to something immoral. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “males shamelessly engaging in sexual activity with each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
170	1:27	u2hh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατεργαζόμενοι	1	Paul speaks figuratively of men doing sexual acts with each other as if it could produce something. He means that what they are doing is morally shameful. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “committing” or “engaging in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
171	1:27	sjhb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ τὴν ἀντιμισθίαν ἣν ἔδει τῆς πλάνης αὐτῶν, ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἀπολαμβάνοντες	1	In the original language the phrase the penalty is at the front of the clause for emphasis. If it would be more natural in your language, you could arrange the order of these phrases to show that emphasis. Alternate translation: “and the penalty which was necessary for their perversion receiving in themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
172	1:27	jtru		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	2	Here, and indicates that what follows is the result of the shameless acts. Alternate translation: “and as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
173	1:27	raet		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἀπολαμβάνοντες	1	Paul speaks figuratively of the penalty for their sinful activity as if it were something that they could receive inside of themselves. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “experiencing in their own bodies” or “receiving among themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
174	1:27	x6fz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀντιμισθίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of penalty, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the punishing act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
175	1:27	dbtt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἣν ἔδει τῆς πλάνης αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of perversion, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “which was necessary for their perverted acts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
176	1:28	bt7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐκ ἐδοκίμασαν, τὸν Θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει	1	The phrase having God in their full awareness is an idiom that means “thinking about God” or “acknowledging God.” If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “they did not approve of thinking about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
177	1:28	f53x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸν Θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of full awareness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “being fully aware of God” or “fully acknowledging that God exists” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
178	1:28	yy1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς	1	See how you translated this phrase in verses 24 and 26. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
179	1:28	p8z2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	εἰς ἀδόκιμον νοῦν	1	Paul is speaking of the minds of these ungodly people in general, not of one particular mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “to disapproved minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
180	1:28	r1pt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς ἀδόκιμον νοῦν	1	Here, mind refers to a person’s will and moral reasoning. The mind of one of these ungodly people is disapproved, which means that it has been rejected by God as worthless. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state these ideas explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a mind that has become worthless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
181	1:28	ie4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ποιεῖν	1	Here, to do could refer to: (1) the result of a disapproved mind. Alternate translation: “as a result they do” or “causing them to practice” (2) the purpose of a disapproved mind. Alternate translation: “so that they do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
182	1:28	aye6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα	1	The phrase those things that are not proper refers to what Paul describes in verses 29–31. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those improper things that follow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
183	1:29	c2e2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany	General Information:	0	General Information: In verses 29–31 Paul uses a repetitive series of sentences and ideas to show how evil these ungodly and unrighteous people are. This is a list of the “things that are not proper” of which those people in verses 18–28 are guilty. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done wrong. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
184	1:29	v0zj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πεπληρωμένους πάσῃ ἀδικίᾳ, πονηρίᾳ, πλεονεξίᾳ, κακίᾳ	1	Paul uses filled with figuratively to refer to these ungodly people as if they were a container filled with the sins that Paul lists in this clause. Like a container that has been filled with something, the people are completely controlled by these sins. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fully controlled by unrighteousness, wickedness, covetousness, and malice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
185	1:29	t4qm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πεπληρωμένους	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they filled themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
186	1:29	uqks		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πεπληρωμένους πάσῃ ἀδικίᾳ, πονηρίᾳ, πλεονεξίᾳ, κακίᾳ;	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of unrighteousness, wickedness, covetousness, and malice, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “filled with all unrighteous, wicked, covetous, and malicious thoughts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
187	1:29	a7s3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μεστοὺς φθόνου, φόνου, ἔριδος, δόλου, κακοηθείας	1	Paul uses full of figuratively to refer to these ungodly people as if they were a container full of the sins that Paul lists in this clause. Like a container that is full of something, the people are completely controlled by these sins. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fully controlled by envy, murder, strife, deceit, and evil intent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
188	1:29	dzda		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μεστοὺς φθόνου, φόνου, ἔριδος, δόλου, κακοηθείας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of envy, murder, strife, deceit, and evil intent, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “they are full of envious, murderous, contentious, and deceitful thoughts, and they intend to do evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
189	1:30	f4tt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	θεοστυγεῖς, ὑβριστάς, ὑπερηφάνους, ἀλαζόνας & ἀπειθεῖς	1	Paul is using these adjectives as nouns in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who hate God, people who are insolent, people who are arrogant, people who are boastful … people who are disobedient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
190	1:30	th8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καταλάλους & ἐφευρετὰς κακῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns slanderers and inventors in another way. Alternate translation: “people who speak against others … people who invent ways to do evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
191	1:30	qq50		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐφευρετὰς κακῶν	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe inventors who invent evil things. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they invent evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
192	1:31	i7ix		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἀσυνέτους, ἀσυνθέτους, ἀστόργους, ἀνελεήμονας	1	Paul is using these adjectives as nouns in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are senseless, faithless, heartless, and merciless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
193	1:32	cxx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ δικαίωμα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteous decree, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is rightly decreed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
194	1:32	ytu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a the righteous decree that comes from God. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s righteous decree” or “what God decrees is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
195	1:32	z12q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1	Here, that indicates that what follows is the content of the the righteous decree of God. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “namely,” or “in other words,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
196	1:32	iqg1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τὰ τοιαῦτα & αὐτὰ & τοῖς πράσσουσιν	1	The pronouns such things and things and them refer to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in verses 28–31. If this would confuse your readers, you could make state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “such improper things … these improper things … those who keep doing these improper things” or “these kinds of evil things … these evil things … those who keep doing these evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
197	1:32	p9e9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἄξιοι θανάτου	1	Paul is using the adjective worthy as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who deserve death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
198	1:32	t0ls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “are worthy to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
199	1:32	awth		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν	1	Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “are worthy to die spiritually” or “are worthy of spiritual death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
200	2:intro	dse2				0	Romans 2 General Notes Structure and formatting All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20) All non-Jews have sinned (1:18–32) All Jews have sinned (2:1–3:8) In this chapter Paul shifts his audience from Roman Christians to people who “judge” other people and do not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]]) Special concepts in this chapter “The Law” In this chapter Paul uses the singular noun “the law” to refer to the group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. Paul says that those who try to obey the Law of Moses will not be justified by trying to obey it. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter In verses 1–5 Paul uses the singular pronoun “you” and the singular noun “man” to refer to all people in general. If your language does not use singular pronouns or singular nouns to refer to a group of people, you can use a different expression. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-crowd]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
201	2:1	y6ts		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	Therefore here marks a new section of the letter. It also introduces a result clause that summarizes the consequences of the behavior that Paul described in 1:18–32. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “So then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
202	2:1	d7pj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-crowd	εἶ & κρίνεις & σεαυτὸν κατακρίνεις & πράσσεις, ὁ κρίνων	1	Paul uses the singular pronoun you here to refer to all people in general. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “every one of you is … every one of you judges … every one of you condemns yourself … every one of you who judges practices” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-crowd]])
203	2:1	atxo			ἀναπολόγητος	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:20.
204	2:1	md5e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ὦ ἄνθρωπε	1	O man here is an exclamation that is meant to convict every judgmental person in the human race. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this idea. Alternate translation: “every human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
205	2:1	x3mi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ἄνθρωπε	1	Here, man is a singular noun that refers to humanity in general. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter Alternate translation: “human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
206	2:1	n2mu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, for introduces a reason clause. In the rest of the verse Paul gives the reasons why anyone who judges is without excuse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
207	2:1	jt4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν ᾧ	1	The word translated that which is a pronoun that refers to any way or any time a person might judge someone else. You may need to make this explicit in your language. Alternate translation: “anytime” or “in anything that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
208	2:1	ybp2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὸν ἕτερον	1	Here, the other refers to any other person. You may need to make this explicit in your language. Alternate translation: “any other person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
209	2:1	nz11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, for introduces a clause that explains why these judgmental people are self-condemned. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
210	2:1	wumc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τὰ & αὐτὰ	1	The phrase the same things refers to acts for which people judge one another. Use a natural way in your language to communicate this idea. Alternate translation: “the very same deeds” or “the same things you judge them for doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
211	2:2	jr4i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν	1	Here, we could refer to: (1) Paul and the church at Rome. Alternate translation: “all of us believers in Christ” (2) mankind in general. Alternate translation: “all people” Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
212	2:2	qca8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the judgment that God does. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s judgment” or “how God judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
213	2:2	kfy1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν κατὰ ἀλήθειαν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of judgment and truth, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how God judges is according to what is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
214	2:2	lfqn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ ἀλήθειαν	1	This phrase indicates the manner in which God will judge those who act sinfully. He will judge them according to the sins they truly committed. If this phrase might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “based on the facts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
215	2:2	j46f			τοὺς & πράσσοντας	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:32.
216	2:2	mjao		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ τοιαῦτα	1	Here, such things refers to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in 1:28–32. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “such improper things” or “these kinds of evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
217	2:3	zwg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	λογίζῃ δὲ τοῦτο, ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὁ κρίνων τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας, καὶ ποιῶν αὐτά, ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ?	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that these judgmental people should know that God will finally judge them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But you should not think, O man, who judges those who are practicing such things and you are doing the same things, that you will escape from the judgment of God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
218	2:3	jct9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1	The pronoun this refers to the final clause of this verse that you will escape from the judgment of God. You could use a natural way in your language to make this idea explicit. Alternate translation: “this fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
219	2:3	ysys		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τοῦτο, ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὁ κρίνων τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας, καὶ ποιῶν αὐτά, ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “that you will escape from the judgment of God, O man, who judges those who are practicing such things and you are doing the same things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
220	2:3	rk75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ὦ ἄνθρωπε	1	See how you translated this phrase in verse 1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
221	2:3	mo4p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ τοιαῦτα & αὐτά	1	The phrases such things and the same things refer to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in 1:28–32. See how you translated such things in verse 2 and the same things in verse 1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
222	2:3	bd82		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, judgment is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who someone could escape from. Paul means that no one can avoid God’s judgment. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “that you will not prevent God’s judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
223	2:3	hpej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in verse 2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
224	2:4	pex3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ τοῦ πλούτου τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας καταφρονεῖς, ἀγνοῶν ὅτι τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει?	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that these judgmental people should know that the kindness of God leads them to repentance. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You who scorn the riches of his kindness and forbearance and patience surely know that the kindness of God leads you to repentance!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
225	2:4	v9yf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-crowd	καταφρονεῖς & σε	1	In this verse Paul uses the singular pronoun you here to refer to all of humanity in general. See how you translated you in verses 1 and 3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-crowd]])
226	2:4	w537		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ πλούτου τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας	1	Paul speaks figuratively of God’s kindness and forbearance and patience as if they were wealth that could be acquired or rejected. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “acquiring his wonderful kindness and forbearance and patience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
227	2:4	swj9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind the words kindness, forbearance, and patience, you could express these ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of how kind, forbearing, and patient he is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
228	2:4	pplt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας & τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the kindness, forbearance, and patience that characterize God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of God’s kindness, forbearance, and patience … God’s kindness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
229	2:4	acip		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει	1	Paul speaks of the kindness of God figuratively as if it were a person who could lead someone to repentance. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God uses his kindness to cause you to repent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
230	2:4	u0io		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει	1	Here, to repentance is a goal clause. Paul is stating the goal of the kindness of God. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a goal clause. Alternate translation: “leads you to repent” or “guides you to deeply change the way you perceive things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
231	2:4	jamv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μετάνοιάν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of repentance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to deeply change the way you perceive things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
232	2:5	agl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατὰ δὲ τὴν σκληρότητά σου	1	Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were a hard substance. He means that these people stubbornly refuse to repent from their judgmental way of life. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “But according to your stubbornness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
233	2:5	v6z1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀμετανόητον καρδίαν	1	Here, heart figuratively refers to a person’s will or inner being. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “unrepentant will” or “unwillingness to repent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
234	2:5	fv4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	θησαυρίζεις σεαυτῷ ὀργὴν	1	Here Paul speaks of wrath figuratively as if it were an object that someone could store up. He means that the longer people refuse to repent, the greater is God’s wrath against them. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you are increasing how much wrath God has against you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
235	2:5	s7cs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὀργὴν & ὀργῆς	1	Here Paul uses wrath figuratively to refer to the outcome of God’s wrath, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of this word in 1:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
236	2:5	pck0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul assumes that his readers will know that both the day of wrath and the revelation of the righteous judgment of God refer to the time in the future when God will punish all wicked people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the time God finally punishes wicked people and reveals his righteous judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
237	2:5	uz3k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a day that is characterized by wrath and by the revelation of the righteous judgment of God. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning differently. Alternate translation: “on the day characterized by God’s wrath and the revelation of his righteous judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
238	2:5	ay1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of wrath, revelation, and judgment, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “on the day of God’s wrathful acts when he reveals how righteously he judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
239	2:5	fnpj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the righteous judgment of God as what the revelation reveals. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an alternate expression. Alternate translation: “when God reveals his righteous judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
240	2:5	sume		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the righteous judgment that is carried out by God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an alternate expression. Alternate translation: “of God judging righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
241	2:6	frov		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἀποδώσει ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ	1	This clause is a quotation from the Old Testament (Psalm 62:12). If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
242	2:6	jwcx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀποδώσει ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul uses pay back figuratively to refer to appropriately punishing or rewarding someone as if the punishment or reward was reciprocal payment for that person’s deeds. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will appropriately punish or reward each one according to his deeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
243	2:6	gj1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun deeds in another way. Alternate translation: “how he acts” or “what he does” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
244	2:7	ylpm			General Information:	0	General Information: In verses 7–10 Paul explains what he means when he said in verse 6 that God will “pay back to each according to his deeds.”
245	2:7	rrbf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τοῖς & καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ, δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν ζητοῦσιν, ζωὴν αἰώνιον;	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “eternal life to those who are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility according to endurance of good work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
246	2:7	gec6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “eternal life is what God pays back” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
247	2:7	sqdo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς & ζητοῦσιν	1	Paul uses seeking figuratively to refer to these people as if they were trying to find something. He means that they are trying to live in such a way as to obtain glory and honor and incorruptibility. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to those who … keep trying to attain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
248	2:7	zyff			τοῖς & καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ & ζητοῦσιν, ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	Here, according to could indicate: (1) the means by which these people are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility. Alternate translation: “everlasting life to those who, by means of endurance of good work, are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility” (2) the reason why God gives these people everlasting live. Alternate translation: “because they endure in good work and are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility, everlasting life”
249	2:7	d2gw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of endurance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to the fact that they keep on doing good work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
250	2:7	ub51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns glory, honor, and incorruptibility in another way. Alternate translation: “for God to glorify, honor, and cause them to live forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
251	2:8	j1e6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ἐριθείας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of ambition, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from being selfishly ambitious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
252	2:8	fcb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	καὶ ἀπειθοῦσι τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, πειθομένοις δὲ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how sinful these people are. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “who are disobedient to all that is true and right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
253	2:8	xhtm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἀπειθοῦσι τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, πειθομένοις δὲ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ	1	Here, the truth is spoken of figuratively as if it were a person whom someone could disobey, and unrighteousness is spoken of as if it were a person whom someone could obey. Paul means that these people reject what God says is true and right by disobeying him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who reject what God says is true and right by disobeying him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
254	2:8	m7pm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀληθείᾳ & τῇ ἀδικίᾳ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of truth and unrighteousness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is true … what is unrighteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
255	2:8	ytny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the verse 6. Alternate translation: “wrath and anger is what God pays back” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
256	2:8	exor		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὀργὴ	1	Here Paul uses wrath figuratively to refer to the outcome of God’s wrath, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of this word in 1:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
257	2:8	wa6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of wrath and anger, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God is wrathful and angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
258	2:8	blwx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός	1	The words wrath and anger mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize God’s intense anger toward people who are disobedient to the truth. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “fierce wrath” or “angry wrath” or “wrathful anger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
259	2:9	ospb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία, ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ψυχὴν ἀνθρώπου τοῦ κατεργαζομένου τὸ κακόν	1	Paul speaks figuratively of Tribulation and distress as if these ideas were located on top of a person. He means that every evil person will experience Tribulation and distress. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Every human soul that produces the evil will experience tribulation and distress” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
260	2:9	qonf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of Tribulation and ** distress**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “difficult and distressing times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
261	2:9	u8f7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία	1	These two words mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how intense God’s judgment will be against these people. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Distressing tribulation” or “Intense distress” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
262	2:9	ck9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	πᾶσαν ψυχὴν ἀνθρώπου	1	Paul uses soul of man to refer to the whole life of a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could use express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “every human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
263	2:9	msox		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπου	1	Although the term man is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
264	2:9	n7q4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὸ κακόν	1	Paul is using the adjective evil as a noun in order to describe things people do. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “what is evil” or “things that are evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
265	2:9	a9s5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰουδαίου τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνος	1	This phrase could mean: (1) the Jews will have greater responsibility because God offered salvation to them first. Alternate translation: “especially for the Jewish person and also for the non-Jewish person” (2) the Jews will be judged before non-Jews, which is the same meaning as in 1:16. Alternate translation: “first for the Jewish person and then for the non-Jewish person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
266	2:9	csnc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἕλληνος	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
267	2:10	i9tg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δόξα & καὶ τιμὴ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of glory and honor, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God will glorify and honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
268	2:10	t2od		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰρήνη	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Here, peace could refer to: (1) feeling calm and secure. Alternate translation: “a peaceful feeling” (2) being at peace with God. Alternate translation: “a peaceful relationship with God” (3) both a peaceful feeling and a peaceful relationship with God. “a peaceful feeling and a peaceful relationship with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
269	2:10	ib56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὸ ἀγαθόν	1	Paul is using the adjective good as a noun in order to describe things people do. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “good deeds” or “things that are good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
270	2:10	u06j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
271	2:11	eol0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐ & ἐστιν προσωπολημψία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of favoritism, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God does not honor one type of person above another” or “God is not more favorable toward one person than another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
272	2:12	wkx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in verses 12–16 gives the reason for the phrase “there is no favoritism with God” in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to make this emphasis explicit. Alternate translation: “This is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
273	2:12	ecsk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅσοι & ἀνόμως ἥμαρτον	1	Paul uses this phrase to refer to non-Jews, which he calls “the Greek” in verses 9–10. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many non-Jewish people as have sinned without the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
274	2:12	t3qs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ἀνόμως & ἀνόμως & νόμῳ & νόμου	1	The word law is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “without God’s laws … without God’s laws … God’s laws … God’s laws” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
275	2:12	m6cy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνόμως & ἀνόμως	1	Here, without the law refers to not knowing God’s law. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without knowing God’s law” or “in ignorance of God’s law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
276	2:12	qkh4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καὶ ἀπολοῦνται	1	Here Paul uses perish figuratively to refer to eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will also be punished eternally” or “will also experience eternal punishment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
277	2:12	jwvz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅσοι ἐν νόμῳ ἥμαρτον	1	Paul uses this phrase to refer to Jews, who are the people to whom God gave his law. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many Jewish people as have sinned with the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
278	2:12	w4cp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διὰ νόμου κριθήσονται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God will judge by his law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
279	2:12	a0k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ νόμου	1	Here, by indicates that the law is the standard by which God will judge those who know his law. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to what the law requires” or “by what the law says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
280	2:13	sw8x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that this verse gives the reason why God judges both groups of people mentioned in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why someone does something. Alternate translation: “God judges both groups of people impartially because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
281	2:13	a8ra		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου & νόμου	1	See how you translated the law in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
282	2:13	eg4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ & δίκαιοι παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	Paul uses with God figuratively here to describe righteous people as if they were located in the presence of God. He means that God makes them right with himself. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “are not made righteous by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
283	2:13	c1bu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ ποιηταὶ νόμου δικαιωθήσονται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “God will justify the doers of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
284	2:14	q2id		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that verses 14–16 give another reason why God judges both groups of people mentioned in verse 12. Verses 14–16 explain why Gentiles who do not know God’s law are still sinners. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why someone does something. Alternate translation: “God also judges both groups of people impartially because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
285	2:14	vlum		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὰ μὴ νόμον ἔχοντα & νόμον μὴ ἔχοντες	1	Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they own or possess the law. He means that they are unaware of the law that God gave to the Jewish people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated “without the law” in verse 12. Alternative translation: “who are unaware of God’s law … who are unaware of God’s law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
286	2:14	zhmw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον & τοῦ νόμου & νόμον	1	See how you translated the law in verse 12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
287	2:14	h53h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	φύσει & ποιῶσιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun nature in another way. Alternate translation: “naturally do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
288	2:14	atda		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ τοῦ νόμου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the specific rules that make up the law. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the rules within the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
289	2:14	symg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἑαυτοῖς εἰσιν νόμος	1	Here Paul speaks of Gentiles figuratively as if they were a law. Paul means that the non-Jewish people still have their own rules about what is right and wrong that are also part of God’s law. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning in plainly. Alternate translation: “are actually obeying the God’s law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
290	2:15	xl6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἵτινες ἐνδείκνυνται τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου, γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	Paul speaks figuratively of the non-Jewish people obeying some basic rules from the Law of Moses as if they were showing the work of the law to other people. He means that non-Jewish people demonstrate that they naturally understand some rules of the law by obeying those rules. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who make others aware that they understand the work of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
291	2:15	wtit		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου, γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of the works of the law as if they can be written on the surfaces of peoples’ hearts. He means that God has enabled non-Jewish people to know generally what is right or wrong even though they do not know the Law of Moses. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they know the work of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
292	2:15	x35c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the work that characterizes obeying the law. This phrase has a similar meaning to “the things of the law” in the previous verse. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the work that the law requires a person to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
293	2:15	v60q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God wrote on their hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
294	2:15	ja5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	See how you translated “heart” in 1:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
295	2:15	jmeo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	συνμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως	1	Paul uses the singular conscience figuratively to refer to the individual consciences of these people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “their consciences bearing witness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
296	2:15	z28q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	συνμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως	1	Here Paul uses conscience figuratively as if it were a person bearing witness in a courtroom. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their conscience confirms that this is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
297	2:15	ub8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	συνμαρτυρούσης & καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων, τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων	1	This clause explains what bearing witness means. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer or begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “bearing witness, namely, the thoughts of each person both accusing or even defending them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
298	2:15	qk53		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων, τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων	1	Here, thoughts are spoken of figuratively as if they were a person who could accuse or defend someone in court. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation (remove preceding comma): “by accusing or defending them in the way they think” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
299	2:16	o6kx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ	1	Here, day refers to a point in time when something happens. It does not refer to a 24-hour length of time. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a point in time is coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
300	2:16	c5fp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὅτε κρίνει ὁ Θεὸς	1	Paul assumes that his readers will know that the day when God will judge refers to the time in the future when God will judge everyone, as Paul also mentioned in verses 2 and 5. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the future time when God finally judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
301	2:16	lyvd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe secrets that men have. These secrets are specifically secret thoughts that people have, as indicated by the word “thoughts” in the previous verse. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “men’s secrets” or “the secrets that men keep” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
302	2:16	gxet		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of secrets, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what men secretly think” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
303	2:16	r8hz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of human beings” or “of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
304	2:16	xb7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου, διὰ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “through Christ Jesus, according to my gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
305	2:16	e9bp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου	1	Paul speaks figuratively of the gospel as if it belongs to him. He means that this is the gospel God has entrusted him to preach. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “according to God’s gospel that I preach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
306	2:17	lc6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Connecting Statement: But here indicates that in verses 17–29 Paul changes topics from talking about non-Jewish people who don’t know the Law of Moses to Jews who know the Law. He explains why the Jews as well cannot escape God’s judgment. Alternate translation: “You also need to know that” or “However” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
307	2:17	cnq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Here, if indicates the beginning of a conditional sentence that extends from this verse to verse 21. Paul speaks as if these descriptions of Jews were hypothetical possibilities, but he means that they are actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
308	2:17	kfe8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	σὺ	1	Even though Paul is speaking to Jewish people, he is hypothetically addressing an individual, so you and your and yourself is singular throughout 2:17–27 unless otherwise noted. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of you and your and yourself in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
309	2:17	pglg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σὺ Ἰουδαῖος ἐπονομάζῃ	1	Paul speaks figuratively of the Jews as if they named themselves. He means that they consider themselves to be Jews. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “you call yourself Jewish” or “you regard yourself as truly Jewish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
310	2:17	gz6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐπαναπαύῃ νόμῳ,	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context, which is God’s judgment of sinners. Alternate translation: “rely upon the law to escape God’s judgment” or “rely upon the law to save you from God’s judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
311	2:17	dapj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καυχᾶσαι ἐν Θεῷ	1	Paul speaks figuratively of the Jews as if they were boasting inside of God. He means that the Jews brag that they are the only nation that knows God. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “brag that you are the only ones who know God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
312	2:18	xn6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ γινώσκεις τὸ θέλημα, καὶ δοκιμάζεις τὰ διαφέροντα, κατηχούμενος ἐκ τοῦ νόμου,	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “and because you are instructed from the law, you know his will and approve of what is excellent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
313	2:18	qxkt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ θέλημα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun will in another way. Alternate translation: “what God wills” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
314	2:18	aqbh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηχούμενος ἐκ τοῦ νόμου	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “others having instructed you from the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
315	2:19	nk76		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	πέποιθάς τε σεαυτὸν ὁδηγὸν εἶναι	1	Paul uses the word yourself to emphasize how convinced the Jews are that they are the only ones who can spiritually guide others. Use a way that is natural in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “and you have convinced yourself that you alone are a guide” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
316	2:19	wi7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁδηγὸν εἶναι τυφλῶν	1	Paul uses guide figuratively to refer to the Jews as if they were the only people who could clearly see. He also uses blind figuratively to refer to non-Jews as if they were unable to see. He means that the Jews think they are the only ones who can teach others God’s truth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “that you are the only ones who can teach others what is true about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
317	2:19	beop		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁδηγὸν εἶναι τυφλῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of guide, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that you can guide blind men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
318	2:19	ql0b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τυφλῶν	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to blind people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
319	2:19	j76c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ὁδηγὸν & τυφλῶν, φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how strongly the Jews believed that non-Jews were ignorant about God’s truth. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the two ideas into one. Alternate translation: “the only ones who can guide those who are unaware of what is true about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
320	2:19	xlge		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει	1	Here Paul uses light figuratively to refer to a Jewish person, and he uses those in darkness figuratively to refer to non-Jews. He means that the Jews think they can teach non-Jews about God the way that a light shines on people who are in a dark place. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone who can reveal what is true about God to those who do not know about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
321	2:20	ymey		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	παιδευτὴν ἀφρόνων, διδάσκαλον νηπίων, ἔχοντα τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐν τῷ νόμῳ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases, since the third phrase gives the reason for the result that the first two phrases describe. Alternate translation: “since having in the law the form of the knowledge and of the truth, you believe you should be an instructor of foolish men, a teacher of little children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
322	2:20	pf6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	παιδευτὴν ἀφρόνων, διδάσκαλον νηπίων	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how strongly the Jews believed that non-Jews were ignorant about God’s truth. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “the only people who can instruct those people who are as foolish as children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
323	2:20	ar5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διδάσκαλον νηπίων	1	Paul speaks figuratively of the non-Jews as if they were little children. He means that they are ignorant about God. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “people who are spiritually ignorant” or “people who are like uneducated infants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
324	2:20	ose0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔχοντα τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐν τῷ νόμῳ	1	Paul speaks figuratively of the law as if it were a physical shape that someone could possess. He means that the law contains God’s true knowledge that the Jews think they exclusively own. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “understanding through God’s law how a person can truly know God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
325	2:20	ua61		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας	1	Paul is using the possessive forms of the knowledge and of the truth to describe the form of the law. Here, of knowledge and of the truth could indicate: (1) what the law contains. Alternate translation: “the form that contains the knowledge and the truth” (2) what the law represents. Alternate translation: “what represents knowledge and truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
326	2:20	y6i5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of knowledge and ** truth**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what we know about God and what is true about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
327	2:21	vy0h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὁ οὖν διδάσκων ἕτερον, σεαυτὸν οὐ διδάσκεις? ὁ κηρύσσων μὴ κλέπτειν, κλέπτεις?	1	In verses 21–23 Paul transitions from his description of the Jews in verses 17–20 to a series of rhetorical questions. These questions emphasize the hypocrisy of the Jews, who thought they were superior to non-Jews because they knew the Law of Moses. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate Paul’s words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “then you, who teach another, do not teach yourself! You, who preach not to steal, actually steal!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
328	2:21	rftq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is the second half of the factual conditional statement that Paul began with “if you name yourself a Jew” in verse 17. Paul wants to show that what the Jews believe and how they live are in contrast. If you divided verses 17–21 into separate sentences, then you may need to include a short form of the “if” statement here. Alternate translation: “if all this is really true, then” or “since all this is really true, then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
329	2:21	uq9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	ἕτερον	1	Here, another is a singular pronoun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular pronouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “other people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
330	2:21	abq0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σεαυτὸν οὐ διδάσκεις	1	Here Paul implies that the Jews need to teach themselves because they do not actually obey the laws that they teach. They act as if they do not know the Law of Moses. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “since you don’t obey the law, do you not teach yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
331	2:22	parm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὁ λέγων μὴ μοιχεύειν, μοιχεύεις? ὁ βδελυσσόμενος τὰ εἴδωλα, ἱεροσυλεῖς?	1	Like in the previous verse, Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form twice to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You, who says not to commit adultery, actually commit adultery! You, who abhor idols, actually rob temples!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
332	2:22	dmpg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἱεροσυλεῖς	1	Here Paul implies that the temples the Jews rob are where idols are kept and worshipped. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “do you rob temples where idols are kept” or “should you actually enter an idol temple and rob it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
333	2:23	z80m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὃς ἐν νόμῳ καυχᾶσαι διὰ τῆς παραβάσεως τοῦ νόμου, τὸν Θεὸν ἀτιμάζεις	1	Like in the previous two verses, Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You, who boast in the law, actually dishonor God through the transgression of the law!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
334	2:23	grr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃς ἐν νόμῳ καυχᾶσαι	1	Paul uses in the law figuratively as if it were something that people could boast inside of. He means that the Jews brag that they are the only nation who knows God’s law, which has similar meaning to “boast in God” in verse 17. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “You, who brag that you are the only ones who know God’s law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
335	2:23	ob98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς παραβάσεως τοῦ νόμου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of transgression, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by transgressing the law” or “by breaking the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
336	2:24	yp4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τὸ γὰρ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “For, just as it is written, ‘the name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles because of you.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
337	2:24	z54i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “These things I have said about you are true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
338	2:24	lk5n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	In this clause Paul quotes part of Isaiah 52:5. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
339	2:24	c4sk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to indicate the name that belongs to God. Paul does not mean that God is a name. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
340	2:24	mvwq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul uses the name of God figuratively to refer toGod himself. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
341	2:24	ccm9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles blaspheme the name of God because of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
342	2:24	m2bq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because of you the name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
343	2:24	pg0g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ ὑμᾶς	1	Paul quotes Isaiah implying that the bad behavior of the Jews is what causes the Gentiles to blaspheme the name of God. Since the Jews were supposed to represent God to the world, their bad behavior misrepresented God so that the Gentiles blasphemed him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a result of how you act” or “because of the way you behave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
344	2:24	e144		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	δι’ ὑμᾶς	1	Here, you is the plural and refers to the Jewish people. This is the only occurrence of plural you in verses 17–27. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
345	2:24	edrf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something Isaiah wrote, you could indicate Isaiah as the subject. Alternate translation: “just as Isaiah wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
346	2:24	end9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	γέγραπται	1	Here Paul uses it is written to indicate a quotation from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 52:5). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
347	2:25	vdu7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that [verses 25–29] provide another reason why both Jews and Gentiles will be punished for their sins, as stated in verse 12. Paul is arguing against the idea that circumcision guaranteed a Jew’s salvation, which some Jews believed. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jews will be judged along with Gentiles because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
348	2:25	vp6o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	περιτομὴ & ἡ περιτομή σου, ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of circumcision and uncircumcision, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Alternate translation: “being circumcised … your being circumcised has become being uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
349	2:25	wm24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὠφελεῖ	1	Paul is leaving out a word here that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “benefits you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
350	2:25	pqhz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	παραβάτης νόμου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a person who transgresses the law. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “one who transgresses the law” or “one who breaks the law”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
351	2:25	xq62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἡ περιτομή σου, ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν	1	Here, your circumcision becomes uncircumcision is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how important it is for God’s people to practice the law. Paul does not mean that the person who transgresses God’s law is no longer physically circumcised. If this would confuse your readers, you express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is as if you are not circumcised” or “it is the same as if you were never circumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
352	2:26	vt7f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	ἐὰν οὖν	1	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the benefits for the uncircumcised one who keeps the requirements of the law. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Let’s suppose then that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
353	2:26	r9i4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἡ ἀκροβυστία	1	Paul is using the adjective uncircumcision as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the people who are uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
354	2:26	nf3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	φυλάσσῃ	1	Here, keeps is an idiom that means “obeys.” If your readers would not understand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is obedient to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
355	2:26	mkhr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ δικαιώματα τοῦ νόμου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe requirements found in the law. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “what the law requires” or “the law’s requirements” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
356	2:26	be71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐχ ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ εἰς περιτομὴν λογισθήσεται	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize how important it is do what the law requires. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “certainly God will consider his uncircumcision to be circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
357	2:26	rjb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐχ ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ εἰς περιτομὴν λογισθήσεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “will God not consider his circumcision to be circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
358	2:26	gjuy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ & περιτομὴν	1	See how you translated these abstract nouns in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
359	2:27	rkxz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	And here could indicate that what follows is continuing the rhetorical question in the previous verse. If you choose the translate the passage in this way, then replace the ending exclamation point with a question mark. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
360	2:27	lqz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	κρινεῖ ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία, τὸν νόμον τελοῦσα	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “since he is fulfilling the law, the uncircumcised by nature will judge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
361	2:27	tpno		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἡ & ἀκροβυστία	1	See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
362	2:27	h2lj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of nature, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the naturally uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
363	2:27	zwh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τελοῦσα	1	Here, fulfilling is an idiom that means “fully obeying.” If your readers would not understand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is fully obedient to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
364	2:27	sv4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ γράμματος καὶ περιτομῆς	1	Here, through could mean: (1) the Jews will be judged despite having the letter and circumcision. Alternate translation: “despite having letter and circumcision” (2) the Jews will be judged while having the letter and circumcision. Alternate translation: “while having letter and circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
365	2:27	nxa1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	γράμματος	1	Paul is figuratively describing the law by association with the letters that make up the law. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the written law code” or “God’s written law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
366	2:27	lkll		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	περιτομῆς	1	See how you translated this abstract noun in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
367	2:27	q795		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	παραβάτην νόμου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun transgressor with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “someone who transgresses the law” or “someone who breaks God’s law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
368	2:28	g2vh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows is the reason for what has just been stated. This verse is Paul’s conclusion to the statements he made in verses 25–27. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Truly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
369	2:28	lfuj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἰουδαῖός	1	Here Paul uses Jew to refer to someone who is one of God’s people because he truly trusts in God for salvation, like Abraham did. Jew here does not refer to someone who only has Jewish ancestors. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a spiritual Jew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
370	2:28	rohy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ φανερῷ	1	Here, visibly refers to the Jewish religious practices that other people can see, such as circumcision or wearing special clothing. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does externally visible Jewish rituals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
371	2:28	n34i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ & περιτομή	1	Here Paul uses circumcision figuratively to refer to the change in thinking and attitude that happens when God saves a person. It can also be considered an inward mark of belonging to God’s people, like how circumcision was an outer mark of being Jewish. This was called “circumcision of the heart” in the Old Testament (Deuteronomy 30:6; Jeremiah 4:4). Here, circumcision does not refer to the Jewish ritual. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this spiritual circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
372	2:28	s44m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐν σαρκὶ	1	Paul uses the flesh figuratively to mean “the whole body,” which is made of flesh. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “on the body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
373	2:29	b6ag		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ Ἰουδαῖος	1	The word translated secretly refers to something that other people cannot see or that is hidden. The meaning here is the opposite of “visibly” in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a Jew in an inward way not seen by others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
374	2:29	u7b6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἰουδαῖος	1	Here Paul uses Jew figuratively in the same way he did in the previous verse. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
375	2:29	d1go		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	περιτομὴ καρδίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a circumcision that is performed in the heart. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “circumcision is performed in the heart” or “circumcision is an inward change” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
376	2:29	hbiv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	περιτομὴ καρδίας	1	The phrase circumcision of the heart is an idiom that refers to the change in thinking and attitude that happens when God saves a person. It can also be considered an inward mark of belonging to God’s people, like how circumcision was an outer mark of being Jewish. This expression first occurred in the Old Testament (Deuteronomy 30:6; Jeremiah 4:4).If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. See how you translated “this circumcision” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “truly belonging to God’s people is by removal of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
377	2:29	n4pp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καρδίας	1	See how you translated this word in 1:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
378	2:29	ffa3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν Πνεύματι, οὐ γράμματι	1	Here, both occurrences of in indicate the means by which something happened. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the Spirit, not by means of the letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
379	2:29	kjc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν Πνεύματι	1	Here, the Spirit could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, who changes a person’s thoughts and attitude when God saves that person, as in the UST. (2) a person’s spirit, which would require interpreting in to refer to a place. Alternate translation: “in one’s spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
380	2:29	gcoq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	γράμματι	1	See how you translated letter in verse 27. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
381	2:29	dlac		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος	1	The pronoun whose refers to the one who is inwardly a Jew. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “that inward Jew’s praise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
382	2:29	qa6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος	1	Paul is using the possessive form whose to indicate who receives the praise. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “his praise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
383	2:29	r4gm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἐξ ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “from people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
384	3:intro	y2kb				0	Romans 3 General Notes Structure and formatting All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20) All non-Jews have sinned (1:18–32) All Jews have sinned (2:1–3:8) Everyone has sinned (3:9–20) Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21) God’s righteousness is received through faith (3:21–26) No one can boast in works (3:27–31) Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 4 and 10–18 of this chapter, which are quotations from the Old Testament. Important figures of speech in this chapter Rhetorical Questions In verses 1–9 and 27–31 Paul frequently uses rhetorical questions in this chapter in order to answer objections that Jews might make about what he is saying. You may need to indicate that Paul is asking these questions as if he were a non-Christian Jew responding to his arguments. When Paul asks the rhetorical questions, he is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. When Paul answers those questions, he is speaking as himself. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this change in speakers with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
385	3:1	v788			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: In verses 1–9 Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions and answers in order to emphasize that both “Jews and Greeks” are “under sin.”
386	3:1	a1l0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 2:28–29. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then what is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
387	3:1	dawv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς?	1	This verse contains two rhetorical questions connected by or. Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 2:28–29. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then the Jew certainly has no advantage, and circumcision certainly has no benefit!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
388	3:1	b7ls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς	1	In this verse Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
389	3:1	bjfo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of advantage or benefit, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “How then is being a Jew advantageous, or how is being circumcised beneficial” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
390	3:1	h4h3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τοῦ Ἰουδαίου	1	Paul is using the possessive form of the Jew to describe for whom there is the advantage. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “for the Jew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
391	3:1	l79f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς περιτομῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form of the circumcision to describe from where the benefit comes. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “that comes from circumcision” or “from being circumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
392	3:2	eq3o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον	1	In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘Great in every way!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
393	3:2	rri9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The advantage of the Jew and the benefit of the circumcision is great is every way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
394	3:2	kzlh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον	1	Great in every way is an exaggeration that Paul uses to emphasize the value of being Jewish and being circumcised. Paul does not mean that everything about being a Jew and being circumcised is beneficial. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows enthusiasm. Alternate translation: “Great in many ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
395	3:2	f2fa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρῶτον μὲν & ὅτι	1	Here, indeed first, that could indicate that: (1) what follows is the first reason in a list of several reasons why being a Jew is beneficial, in which case Paul does not continue the list in this chapter. Alternate translation: “the first of many benefits is indeed that” or “one benefit is indeed that” (2) what follows is the most important reason why being a Jew is beneficial. Alternate translation: “the primary benefit is indeed that” or “the most important thing is indeed that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
396	3:2	mrej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπιστεύθησαν τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God entrusted them with his sayings” or “God trusted them with the sayings of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
397	3:2	jkgk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, the sayings of God could refer to: (1) the entire Old Testament. Alternate translation: “with what God said in the Scriptures” (2) direct speech from God in the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “with the messages that God announced to them in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
398	3:2	qide		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, the possessive form of God could refer to: (1) sayings that came from God. Alternate translation: “with the sayings from God” (2) says that are about God. Alternate translation: “with the sayings about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
399	3:3	d9k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	For here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
400	3:3	mclv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί & εἰ ἠπίστησάν τινες? μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει?	1	In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But some of them were unfaithful! Their unfaithfulness surely cannot nullify the faithfulness of God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
401	3:3	fd0w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί γάρ εἰ ἠπίστησάν τινες? μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει?	1	In this verse Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
402	3:3	i36p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τινες	1	The pronoun some refers to some Jewish people. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “some Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
403	3:3	pkae		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of unfaithfulness or faithfulness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “The fact that they are unfaithful will not nullify God’s faithful acts, will it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
404	3:3	moq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the faithfulness that characterizes God. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the faithfulness that characterizes God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
405	3:4	djn7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο	1	In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
406	3:4	z465		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	May it never be is an exclamatory phrase that communicates a strong prohibition. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating a strong prohibition. Alternate translation: “Absolutely not” or “Certainly not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
407	3:4	kz4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Instead here indicates that what follows is a contrast to the idea in the previous verse that unfaithful Jews could “nullify the faithfulness of God.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But” or “However” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
408	3:4	ld9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	γινέσθω & ὁ Θεὸς ἀληθής	1	Here, let God be true is an imperative phrase, but this is not a command. Instead, Paul is exclaiming that people must consider that God is always truthful regardless of what people think. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “let people always know that God is true” or “may people always declare that God is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
409	3:4	nud9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πᾶς & ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of liar, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “every man lies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
410	3:4	fesk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πᾶς & ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης	1	Paul is leaving out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “let every man be a liar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
411	3:4	hfdf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πᾶς & ἄνθρωπος	1	Although the term man is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “every person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
412	3:4	te39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
413	3:4	b8gv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by David, a king of Israel. Alternate translation: “just as King David wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
414	3:4	f0oq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὅπως ἂν δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, καὶ νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε	1	This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 51:4. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
415	3:4	xli0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅπως	1	So that indicates that what follows is the result of what David had written previously in Psalm 51:4, which is about how David had sinned. Paul assumes that his readers would be familiar with the earlier part of that verse. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have sinned so that” or “Because of my sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
416	3:4	h0ne		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὅπως ἂν δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, καὶ νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε	1	In this sentence, you and your refer to God and are singular. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
417	3:4	lnnr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιωθῇς & ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people would acknowledge how righteous you are … when people attempt to judge you” or “you would prove yourself to be righteous … when others try to judge you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
418	3:4	tj8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου	1	Paul records David using words figuratively to describe the things that God said by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in what you say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
419	3:5	gw3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	εἰ δὲ	1	But here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. In this verse, Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement that Paul made in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If indeed that is true” or “Now if” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
420	3:5	putf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν?	1	In these sentences Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
421	3:5	hjyp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν?	1	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to develop the argument that an unbelieving Jew would make. Alternate translation: “suppose our unrighteousness commends the righteousness of God. Then what will we say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
422	3:5	y6vv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἐροῦμεν	1	Here, our and we are used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Jewish … will we Jews say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
423	3:5	y0r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind unrighteousness and righteousness in another way. Alternate translation: “how unrighteous we are … how righteous God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
424	3:5	ho67		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν?	1	In this sentence Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question here to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. This sentence is also the answer to the hypothetical question that precedes it. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God certainly cannot be unrighteousness for imposing his wrath!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
425	3:5	v30z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εἰ & ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν?	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine the hypothetical conditional statement of the first sentence with the rhetorical question of the second sentence. Alternate translation: “if our unrighteousness commends the righteousness of God, then we certainly cannot say that God is unrighteousness for imposing his wrath!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
426	3:5	e9ux		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν ὀργήν	1	Here Paul uses wrath figuratively to refer to the outcome of God’s wrath, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of wrath in 1:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
427	3:5	j631		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside	(κατὰ ἄνθρωπον λέγω.)	1	Paul could be saying this as an aside in order to show that he is not trying to challenge the righteousness of God. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses like the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. Alternate translation: “I am reasoning like a human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
428	3:5	sd4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	(κατὰ ἄνθρωπον λέγω.)	1	Here, the phrase according to men is an idiom meaning “the way people do” or “like a human being.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I speak based on how human beings perceive things” or “I speak according to mere human reasoning”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
429	3:6	gd5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	See how you translated this in verse 4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
430	3:6	zg9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐπεὶ πῶς κρινεῖ ὁ Θεὸς τὸν κόσμον	1	Here Paul is giving the reason why God is “not unrighteous for imposing his wrath,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for expressing the reason why someone does something. Alternate translation: “Because if God were unrighteous, how would he judge the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
431	3:6	x1y3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς κρινεῖ ὁ Θεὸς τὸν κόσμον	1	In this clause Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question here to emphasize that God could not judge the world if he were unrighteous. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God certainly could not judge the world!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
432	3:6	lnp3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν κόσμον	1	Here Paul uses world figuratively to refer to the people who live in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
433	3:7	htfa			General Information:	0	General Information: In verses 7–9, Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement Paul made in verse 6. A note will inform you of the one parenthetic statement within these verses in which Paul interjects his own voice into the argument.
434	3:7	b9k1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	εἰ δὲ	1	But here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. In this verse, Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement Paul made in the previous verse. See how you translated this in verse 5. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
435	3:7	c2u5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ, τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι	1	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to develop the argument an unbelieving Jew would make. Alternate translation: “suppose the truth of God through my life abounds to his glory. Then why am I still being judged as a sinner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
436	3:7	xysz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But if the truth of God abounds to his glory through my lie” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
437	3:7	j9ji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you could express the same idea with a verbal form or another way. Alternate translation: “how truthful God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
438	3:7	lbji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the truth that characterizes God. Use a natural way in your language to communicate this idea. Alternate translation: “God’s truthfulness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
439	3:7	fa7j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι & κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς	1	Here Paul uses the pronoun my and I to refer to a Jewish person who might give this hypothetical response. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternative translation: “when we Jews act falsely … are we … as sinners” or “when we Jews lie … are we … as sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
440	3:7	o3po		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of lie, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “when I act falsely” or “when I lie” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
441	3:7	je41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ	1	Here, to indicates that this is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “with the result that he is glorified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
442	3:7	h61j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea with a verbal form or another way. Alternate translation: “to demonstrate how glorious he is” or “to glorify him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
443	3:7	yv5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι	1	In this clause Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse, which was also repeated in the previous clause. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “surely I should not still be judged as a sinner!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
444	3:7	iiqc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔτι κἀγὼ & κρίνομαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “does God still judge me” or “should God still keep on judging me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
445	3:7	pgus		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτωλὸς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sinner, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “someone who sins” or “as if I were sinful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
446	3:8	vw1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ	1	And here indicates that in this verse Paul continues speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement he made in verse 6. If it would help your readers, you could state this with a fuller expression. Alternate translation: “Furthermore” or “In addition” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
447	3:8	kb9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ μὴ καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν, ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ, ἵνα ἔλθῃ τὰ ἀγαθά?	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “And not, ‘Let us do evil, so that good may come,’ just as we are blasphemed and just as some affirm we say?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
448	3:8	wr3g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ μὴ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And why not say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
449	3:8	pr4u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ & ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ, ἵνα ἔλθῃ τὰ ἀγαθά	1	In this sentence Paul is not asking for information, but is using an elided question here to emphasize that God could not judge the world if he were unrighteous. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you should say … ‘Let us do the evil things, so that the good things may come!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
450	3:8	o3pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside	καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν	1	Paul is saying this as an aside in order to show that people have been falsely accusing him of teaching that people should sin in order to show how good God is. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses like the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. Alternate translation: “Some people blaspheme us and affirm that we are saying such things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
451	3:8	veic		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	βλασφημούμεθα & ἡμᾶς	1	When Paul says we and us, he could be (1) speaking only of himself in a formal manner. Alternate translation: “I am blasphemed … me” (2) speaking of himself and all other Christians. Alternate translation: “we Christians are blasphemed … us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
452	3:8	klaa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βλασφημούμεθα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people blaspheme us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
453	3:8	vbpa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	μὴ καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν, ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “not say (just as we are blasphemed and just as some affirm us to say) that we should do the evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
454	3:8	pe2c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside	ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν	1	Paul is saying this as an aside in order to show that the people who have been falsely accusing him of teaching people to “do the evil things, so that the good things may come” deserve to be judged by God. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses like the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
455	3:8	re0k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν	1	The pronoun whose here refers to the people who slander Paul by claiming that he teaches people to “do the evil things, so that the good things may come.” If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the judgment of those who say this is just” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
456	3:8	g87e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of judgment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who are justly judged” or “whom God justly judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
457	3:9	z3wu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν? προεχόμεθα?	1	Here Paul concludes his series of rhetorical questions by using the same phrase What then. See how you translated this phrase in verse 1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
458	3:9	y6uz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	προεχόμεθα?	1	Paul is using the question form to express the objection that a Jew might have to what Paul has said previously. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely we are not better off!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
459	3:9	ajj8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	προεχόμεθα	1	Here, we is used exclusively to speak of Paul and his fellow Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Are we Jews better off” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
460	3:9	g85q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	οὐ πάντως	1	Not at all is an exclamatory phrase that communicates a strong negative response to the previous statement. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this idea. Alternate translation: “Absolutely not!” or “In no way!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
461	3:9	cbgq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐ πάντως	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “We are not better off at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
462	3:9	a01e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	προῃτιασάμεθα γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “We are not better off because we have already accused” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
463	3:9	qvjy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	προῃτιασάμεθα	1	Here, we could mean: (1) Paul is speaking only of himself in a formal manner. Alternate translation: “I have already accused” (2) Paul is speaking of himself and other Christians. Alternate translation: “we Christians have already accused” See how you translated we in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
464	3:9	hgs3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἕλληνας	1	Here, Greeks refers to non-Jewish people in general. It does not refer only to people from the country of Greece. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “non-Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
465	3:9	x4eb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑφ’ ἁμαρτίαν	1	The phrase under sin is an idiom that means “under the power of sin” or “controlled by one’s desire to sin.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “controlled by sin” or “ruled by sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
466	3:10	m5r6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany	General Information:	0	General Information: In verses 10–18 Paul uses Old Testament quotations as a repetitive series of sentences in order to show how evil all types of people are. In verses 10–12 he emphasizes the general nature of their evil conduct by repeating the word none four times, and the phrase not even one twice. In verses 13–18 he uses specific examples of their evil conduct. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of the accusations against humanity. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done wrong. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
467	3:10	u88n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
468	3:10	zkzr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “just as the prophets wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
469	3:10	ju1k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς	1	This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of Psalm 14:3. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
470	3:10	yt5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that not even one type of person is righteous. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There is not even one type of person who is righteous” or “Absolutely no one who is righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
471	3:10	bscu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς	1	Paul is using the singular adjectives none righteous and one as nouns in order to describe all people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these adjectives with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “There are no righteous people, not any people” or “There is no righteous person, not even one person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
472	3:11	b0m7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ συνίων; οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ ἐκζητῶν τὸν Θεόν	1	This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of Psalm 14:2 and Psalm 53:3. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
473	3:11	kqs5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οὐκ ἔστιν & οὐκ ἔστιν	1	Paul is using the adjectives none as nouns in order to describe all people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these adjectives with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “There are no people … There are no people” or “There is no person … There is no person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
474	3:11	h9e9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ συνίων	1	Here, who understands refers to someone who is able to think wisely or correctly. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “There is none who is wise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
475	3:11	mn84		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ ἐκζητῶν τὸν Θεόν	1	Her, Paul quotes David usingseeks figuratively to describe people attempting to know God as if God were lost and people needed to find him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who attempts to know God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
476	3:12	lg0i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	πάντες ἐξέκλιναν, ἅμα ἠχρεώθησαν; οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα, οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός	1	This sentence is quotation of Psalm 14:3 and Psalm 53:4. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
477	3:12	cen3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐξέκλιναν	1	Paul quotes David using turned away figuratively to describe these people as if they had left a path that leads to where God is. David means that they refuse to live according to God’s rules. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “refuse to live the way God requires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
478	3:12	a72h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἅμα ἠχρεώθησαν	1	Here, useless implies that these sinful people are so sinful that they do not benefit God or humankind. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “They together became worthless for benefitting anyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
479	3:12	na87		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα, οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that not even one type of person can continually do kindness. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There is not even one type of person who does kindness” or “Absolutely no one who is doing kindness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
480	3:12	v9ed		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οὐκ & ἑνός	1	See how you translated none and one in verse 10. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
481	3:12	b3g1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χρηστότητα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of kindness, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “what is kind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
482	3:13	xr4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν; ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν	1	These two sentences are a quotation from Psalm 5:10. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
483	3:13	c7rh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν; ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν; ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν	1	These three sentences mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing three times, in slightly different ways, to show how harmful the words are that these people say. If saying the same thing three times might confuse your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “The things they say are deadly, deceptive, and damaging” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
484	3:13	nmrs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν	1	Paul quotes David speaking of these people’s throats in general, not of one particular throat. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “throats” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
485	3:13	sx6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul quotes David using throat figuratively to describe something people would say by using their throats to say it. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What they say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
486	3:13	bbq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν	1	Paul quotes David using opened grave figuratively to describe these people’s throat as if it were a deep hole containing rotting corpses. He means that the things these people say are morally corrupt and offend God. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Their throats express moral corruption” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
487	3:13	pemg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul quotes David using tongues figuratively to describe something people would say to deceive someone by using their tongues to say it. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with what they say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
488	3:13	d82g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν	1	This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 140:3. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
489	3:13	b4bp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἰὸς ἀσπίδων	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe poison that comes from asps, which are venomous snakes. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Asp’s poison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
490	3:13	qk16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰὸς ἀσπίδων	1	Paul quotes David using poison of asps figuratively to refer to what people say as if what they say contained poison. He means that the things they say harm people like deadly venom. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “What hurts people like a poisonous snake bite” or “Speech that hurts people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
491	3:13	u40o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul quotes David using lips figuratively to describe something people would say to harm someone by using their lips to say it. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by what they say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
492	3:14	ucnr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὧν τὸ στόμα ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει	1	This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 10:7. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
493	3:14	ujjd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὸ στόμα	1	Paul quotes David speaking of these people’s mouths in general, not of one particular mouth. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “mouths” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
494	3:14	sqr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὧν τὸ στόμα	1	Here Paul quotes David using mouth figuratively to describe people speaking curses and bitter things by using their mouth to say them. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what they say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
495	3:14	j0sg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει	1	Paul quotes David using cursing and bitterness figuratively as if these concepts were thins with which people could fill or load their mouth. He means that these people habitually curse and say bitter things against others. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “habitually curses and says bitter things against others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
496	3:15	e67d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	General Information:	0	General Information: Verses 15–17 are Paul’s paraphrase of Isaiah 59:7–8. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
497	3:15	vds1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ πόδες αὐτῶν	1	Paul quotes Isaiah using feet, a part of the human body, to refer to the whole person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “These people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
498	3:15	quph		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκχέαι αἷμα	1	Paul quotes Isaiah using pour out blood figuratively to refer to violently murdering people, which usually causes blood to come out of the people who are murdered. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to murder others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
499	3:16	bc96		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	σύντριμμα καὶ ταλαιπωρία	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of Destruction and suffering, you could express the same ideas with other expressions. Alternate translation: “They demolish lives and make people suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
500	3:16	rrgr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν	1	Here, ways is an idiom meaning “wherever they go” or “how they behave.” It refers to a person’s daily life. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “characterize how they behave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
501	3:17	zbrd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὁδὸν	1	See how you translated “ways” in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
502	3:17	jb6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁδὸν εἰρήνης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a way that is characterized by peace. He means that these people do not understand how to live peacefully. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a peaceful way” or “a peaceful way to behave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
503	3:18	wr0x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	οὐκ ἔστιν φόβος Θεοῦ ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν	1	This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 36:1. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
504	3:18	bx27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἔστιν φόβος Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of fear, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “They are not afraid of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
505	3:18	frt1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	φόβος Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe fear that people should feel toward for God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “fear for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
506	3:18	m89o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν	1	Here,before their eyes is an idiom that refers to thinking about something. Paul means that these people do not think at all about how terrifying God is. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in their minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
507	3:19	lrdp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Now here indicates that what follows summarizes Paul’s teachings about the law and “the righteousness of God” in verses 1–9. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Indeed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
508	3:19	gc8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν	1	Here, we is used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Jews know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
509	3:19	e8h2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὅσα ὁ νόμος λέγει & λαλεῖ	1	Here Paul speaks of the law figuratively as if it were a person who could speak. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as many things as God says in the law, he speaks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
510	3:19	n399		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ νόμος & τῷ νόμῳ	1	Here Paul uses the law figuratively to refer to the entire Old Testament, which includes the law. Here he is not referring to only the Law of Moses, as he did earlier in the chapter. We know this because in verses 10–18 Paul quoted verses from parts of the Old Testament that are not in the Law of Moses. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures … the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
511	3:19	b0g5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῖς ἐν τῷ νόμῳ	1	Paul uses those with the law to refer to the Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated a similar phrase in 2:12. Alternative translation: “to Jews” or “to those who know the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
512	3:19	end8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for what the law says. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
513	3:19	cy5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πᾶν στόμα φραγῇ	1	Here, every mouth may be shut is an idiom that means “no one can say anything to excuse themselves.” Paul means that no one can defend themselves before God because everyone has sinned. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no human beings can excuse themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
514	3:19	js71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	φραγῇ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may stop talking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
515	3:19	w12y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	πᾶς ὁ κόσμος	1	Paul usesall the world figuratively to refer to all the people living in the world. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the people in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
516	3:19	wwq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπόδικος γένηται & τῷ Θεῷ	1	The phrase may become accountable to God means that God will judge everyone at the final judgment according to how they lived their lives. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God would judge all the people in the world as guilty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
517	3:20	ezbo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διότι	1	Here. because introduces a reason clause. Paul is stating the reason why all humanity is “accountable to God,” as stated in the previous verse. Use natural way in your language to indicate a reason clause. You may need to begin a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” or “As a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
518	3:20	vzot		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σὰρξ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “God will not justify any flesh” or “God will not make any flesh righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
519	3:20	xs9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	σὰρξ	1	Paul uses flesh figuratively to refer to a human being, who is made of flesh. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
520	3:20	d6vi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου & διὰ & νόμου ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας	1	In this verse Paul speaks of the law figuratively as if it were a person who could justify someone or give them full awareness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by doing what God requires in his law … God gives full awareness of sin through his law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
521	3:20	w5qb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐξ ἔργων νόμου	1	See how you translated a similar phrase in 2:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
522	3:20	i7zi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου & νόμου	1	In this verse law is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. It does not refer to the entire Old Testament, as in the previous verse. See how you translated this use of law in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
523	3:20	llh9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ	1	Here, before him is an idiom meaning “in his presence” or “from his perspective.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in his presence” or “before his judgment seat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
524	3:20	xgpp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of full awareness and sin, you could express the same ideas in different way. Alternate translation: “fully aware of being sinful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
525	3:20	aety		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe full awareness about the sin a person has committed. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “full knowledge about sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
526	3:20	jdw9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ & νόμου	1	Here, through law indicates the means by which a person becomes fully aware of sin. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
527	3:21	fqz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	νυνὶ δὲ	1	But now here indicates that what follows is in contrast to Paul’s discussion about the law in 2:1–3:20. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Yet now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
528	3:21	y3te		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	νυνὶ δὲ χωρὶς νόμου, δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ πεφανέρωται	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But now, the righteousness of God has been made known apart from the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
529	3:21	e5ky		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	νόμου & τοῦ νόμου	1	While the first occurrence of the law in this verse refers to the laws that God gave the Jews through Moses, the second occurrence refers to the first five books in the Old Testament that were written by Moses. The ULT shows this different by using the law and the Law respectively. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the laws God gave Israel … the part of Scripture that Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
530	3:21	nlj0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	χωρὶς νόμου	1	Here, apart from the law could mean: (1) apart from doing what the law requires. Alternate translation: “without having to do what the law requires” (2) outside of what the law says. Alternate translation: “not related to what the law says” or “differently than what the law says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
531	3:21	e4qe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ πεφανέρωται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has made his righteousness visible” or “God has revealed his righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
532	3:21	qkis		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
533	3:21	gvca		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μαρτυρουμένη ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Law and the Prophets bearing witness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
534	3:21	tnf8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	μαρτυρουμένη ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	Here Paul uses the Law and the Prophets figuratively as if they were people who could witness or testify in a courtroom. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what God says in the Law and the Prophets is a written testimony to this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
535	3:21	bgyx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	Paul is using the name of two parts of the Hebrew Scriptures, the Law and the Prophets, to represent the entire Hebrew Scriptures in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
536	3:22	pec5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Here, but indicates that what follows explains how a person receives “the righteousness of God”. It does not indicate a contrast. Alternate translation: “namely,” or “even” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
537	3:22	cvhy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
538	3:22	q4m1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διὰ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, faith in Jesus Christ is a possessive form that indicates faith that is associated with Jesus Christ. This could refer to: (1) trust in Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “by trusting in Jesus Christ” or “by believing in Jesus Christ” (2) the faithfulness of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “through the faithfulness that Jesus Christ possesses” or “through how faithful Jesus Christ is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
539	3:22	c4mg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τοὺς πιστεύοντας	1	Paul is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “those who believe in him” or “those who believe in Jesus for salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
540	3:22	o6qe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	Here, for introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why the righteousness of God is for all those who believe. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why something is true. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
541	3:22	daa3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐ & ἐστιν διαστολή	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of distinction, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “God does not discriminate” or “God is not partial” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
542	3:23	x1hu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why “there is no distinction,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why something is true. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
543	3:23	akn9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντες	1	Here Paul uses the adjective all as a noun that refers to all the people who have existed or will exist. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
544	3:23	jbe9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑστεροῦνται τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul speaks figuratively of all people as if they were something that fails to reach its destination. He means that they lack or do not attain the glory of God. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “lack the glory of God” or “fail to attain the glory of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
545	3:23	vwsf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here the possessive form the glory of God could refer to: (1) the glory that God shared with humans when he created them, but which they lost when the first humans sinned. Alternate translation: “the glory God once gave them” or “the glory from God” (2) glorifying God, as in the similar phrase “the glory of the imperishable God” in 1:23. Alternate translation: “of glorifying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
546	3:24	ibi2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι	1	Here, grace is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could justify someone. Paul means that God graciously makes people righteous as a gift. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and are gifted with becoming righteous because God is gracious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
547	3:24	evs8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν	1	Paul assumes that his readers know that those who are being justified freely are “all” those who “have sinned” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all people are being freely justified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
548	3:24	jgcu			δωρεὰν	1	Alternate translation: “as a gift” or “without payment”
549	3:24	atij		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι, διὰ τῆς ἀπολυτρώσεως τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace and redemption, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “by God being gracious through redeeming them in Christ Jesus” or “due to how kind God is, because Christ Jesus redeemed them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
550	3:24	hyeb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπολυτρώσεως	1	The word translated as redemption refers to rescuing someone from captivity by paying a ransom. Your language may require you to indicate what the people are redeemed from. This could mean: (1) Jesus redeems people from eternal punishment. Alternative translation: “redemption from eternal punishment” (2) Jesus redeems people from being enslaved to sin. Alternative translation: “redemption from enslavement to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
551	3:24	lno6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, Paul speaks figuratively of redemption as if it were an object that could be inside Jesus. Paul means that God redeemed all people who believe in Jesus by uniting them to Christ Jesus. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “that comes through union with Christ Jesus” or “that is through being united to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
552	3:25	ci0v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃν προέθετο ὁ Θεὸς ἱλαστήριον	1	Here Paul uses presented figuratively as if Jesus were an Old Testament atonement sacrifice that was presented to God in the temple. He means that Jesus’ death was a sacrifice for the sins of humankind. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “whom God offered to atone for the sins of humanity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
553	3:25	t2d8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἱλαστήριον, διὰ πίστεως & εἰς ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of propitiation, faith, demonstration, or righteousness, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “to atone for people’s sins by trusting … to demonstrate how he makes people righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
554	3:25	m159		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ αἵματι	1	Here Paul uses his blood figuratively to refer to Jesus’ death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in Christ’s death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
555	3:25	ieq9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ἔνδειξιν	1	Here, for indicates that the phrase that follows is the purpose for which God presented Jesus as a propitiation. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order to demonstrate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
556	3:25	ze9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ	1	See how you translated “the righteousness of God” in 1:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
557	3:25	siri		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τὴν πάρεσιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of overlooking, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “because he overlooked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
558	3:25	ydoj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῶν προγεγονότων ἁμαρτημάτων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sin, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “how they had sinned previously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
559	3:26	b2f6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐν	1	Here, in introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason for God “overlooking of the sins that happened previously,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why something is true. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
560	3:26	lm1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of forbearance, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “because God is so forbearing” or “since God forbears” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
561	3:26	cg55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe God who is characterized by forbearance. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in God’s forbearance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
562	3:26	b1xa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πρὸς τὴν ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
563	3:26	v1c9			ἐν τῷ νῦν καιρῷ	1	Alternate translation: “at this time in history” or “currently”
564	3:26	jjwq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν	1	Here, so that indicates that what follows is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God now demonstrates his righteousness. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that he would be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
565	3:26	x6cf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὸν ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ	1	Paul is speaking of all people who have faith in Jesus, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “anyone who is from faith in Jesus” or “every person who trusts in Jesus”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
566	3:26	qdkw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸν ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ	1	Here Paul is using the possessive form to describe a person who is characterized by faith in Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who is characterized by faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
567	3:26	ab0w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πίστεως Ἰησοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in verse 22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
568	3:27	emwi			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: In verses 27–31 Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions and answers in order to emphasize that God alone makes people righteous through faith in Jesus. Like in verses 1–9, Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew when he asks the rhetorical questions, but he is speaking as himself when he answers those questions.
569	3:27	e0wc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in verses 21–26. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If it is God who makes people righteous through faith in Jesus, then where is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
570	3:27	fjm4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question here to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in verses 21–26. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There then is no grounds for boasting!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
571	3:27	mvs0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of boasting as if it were an object that could be in a location. He means that no one can boast because only God makes people righteous. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Then can anyone boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
572	3:27	pub7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of boasting, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “Who then can boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
573	3:27	px29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξεκλείσθη	1	In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical question in the previous sentence. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘It is excluded!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
574	3:27	eufl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξεκλείσθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has excluded it” or “God does not allow it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
575	3:27	v3ut		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	διὰ ποίου νόμου? τῶν ἔργων? & διὰ νόμου πίστεως	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Through what kind of law is a person made righteous? Is a person made righteous through the works of the law? … a person made righteous through a law of faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
576	3:27	dpny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	διὰ ποίου νόμου? τῶν ἔργων?	1	In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous sentence and in verses 21–26. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely through a kind of law! Surely through the works!” or “Surely a person is made righteous through a kind of law! Surely a person is made righteous through works!”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
577	3:27	bgyy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῶν ἔργων?	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a law that is characterized by works. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Through a law characterized by works?” or “By doing what the law requires?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
578	3:27	h9wb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐχί, ἀλλὰ διὰ νόμου πίστεως	1	In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous two sentences. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘No! But through a law of faith.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
579	3:27	tg79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	οὐχί	1	No! is an exclamation that communicates a strong contrast to the previous statement. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “Not at all!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
580	3:27	ynz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διὰ νόμου πίστεως	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a law that is characterized by faith. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “through a law characterized by faith” or “by doing what faith requires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
581	3:27	mlcq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “of trusting in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
582	3:28	qe9p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows explains what “the law of faith” means in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
583	3:28	jtqq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	λογιζόμεθα	1	Here, we is used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Christian Jews, as indicated in verse 9. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we believing Jews consider” or “we believing Jews regard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
584	3:28	t8um		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	1	Although the term man is masculine, Paul is using the word here in the generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “humankind” or “a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
585	3:28	ph88		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιοῦσθαι & ἄνθρωπον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “that God justifies a man” or “that God makes a man righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
586	3:28	jb14		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “by believing in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
587	3:28	s747		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	χωρὶς ἔργων νόμου	1	See how you translated “apart from the law” in verse 21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
588	3:28	ycx2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἔργων νόμου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to refer to the works that God requires in the law. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the works that the law requires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
589	3:29	hdbq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1	Or here indicates that the next two sentences are the responses that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Or you Jews might say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
590	3:29	ineu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐχὶ καὶ ἐθνῶν? ναὶ, καὶ ἐθνῶν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Is he not also God of Gentiles? Yes, he is also God of Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
591	3:29	m8eo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐθνῶν & ἐθνῶν	1	See how you translated this word in 1:5. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
592	3:29	ch7p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	Ἰουδαίων ὁ Θεὸς μόνον? οὐχὶ καὶ ἐθνῶν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the responses that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God is surely not only the God of Jews! He is surely also the God of Gentiles!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
593	3:29	rq5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ναὶ, καὶ ἐθνῶν	1	In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous two sentences. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘Yes, also of Gentiles’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
594	3:29	gp74		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ναὶ	1	Yes is an exclamation word that communicates enthusiasm. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating enthusiasm. Alternate translation (change the period to an exclamation point): “Of course!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
595	3:30	vur7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴπερ	1	Paul uses if as if the rest of the verse were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since we know” or “Because it is true that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
596	3:30	qdiu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἴπερ	1	This phrase introduces the reason why Paul could say in the previous verse that God is also the God of the Gentiles. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “since, indeed” or “we know this is true because, indeed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
597	3:30	ux30		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἷς ὁ Θεός	1	Paul speaks figuratively of God as if he were a number. He means that God is the one and only true God for both Jews and Gentiles. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “there is only one God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
598	3:30	rjxp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ὃς δικαιώσει περιτομὴν ἐκ πίστεως, καὶ ἀκροβυστίαν διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1	This phrase gives us further information about who God is. It is not making a distinction between the one true God and false gods. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is the one who will justify the circumcision by faith, and the uncircumcision through the same faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
599	3:30	kw62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	περιτομὴν & ἀκροβυστίαν	1	The words circumcision and uncircumcision are singular nouns that refers to groups of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the circumcised people … the uncircumcised people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
600	3:30	gk5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	περιτομὴν & ἀκροβυστίαν	1	Here Paul uses the circumcision figuratively to refer to the Jews by associating them with circumcision, and he uses the uncircumcision figuratively to refer to the Gentiles by associating them with uncircumcision. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people … the non-Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
601	3:30	s9i4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐκ πίστεως & διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1	See how you translated this phrase in verse 26. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
602	3:31	vj40		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν	1	Here, then indicates that this sentence is the responses that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then you Jews might say, ‘Do we nullify the law’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
603	3:31	y6qx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question to express the response that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we surely nullify the law through the same faith!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
604	3:31	nzr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οὖν καταργοῦμεν	1	Here, we is used exclusively to speak of the unbelieving Jews whom Paul is speaking on behalf of. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Do we Jews then nullify” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
605	3:31	cw0k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν	1	Here, nullify the law means to make the law useless or no longer applicable to anyone. Paul is stating that the Jews might worry that he is teaching that the Law of Moses does not have any function at all because God makes people righteous by faith. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do we make the law useless” or “Do we throw away the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
606	3:31	aj6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
607	3:31	pjgc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο! ἀλλὰ νόμον ἱστάνομεν	1	In these two sentences Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous sentence. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be! Instead, we establish the law’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
608	3:31	rhy5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	See how you translated this phrase in verse 6. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
609	3:31	ppvo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	νόμον ἱστάνομεν	1	Here, we is used exclusively to refer to Paul and other Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Christians uphold the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
610	3:31	c295		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	νόμον ἱστάνομεν	1	Paul uses uphold figuratively to refer to the law as if it were an object that people could hold up high. The meaning of uphold here is the opposite meaning of nullify earlier in the verse. It could mean: (1) Christians fulfill the requirements of the law by trusting in Jesus, who fulfilled the law for them. Alternate translation: “we fulfill the law by faith” (2) Christians value the law and affirm that it is useful. Alternative translation: “we confirm that the law is useful” or “we affirm that the law has value”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
611	4:intro	f9jc				0	Romans 4 General Notes Structure and formatting Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21) God’s righteousness is received through faith (3:21–26) No one can boast in works (3:27–31) The examples of Abraham and David (4:1–25) Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 7–8 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament. Special concepts in this chapter The purpose of the law of Moses In this chapter Paul continues to develop his argument based on what he wrote in the previous chapter. He explains how God made Abraham, the ancestor of all Jews, righteous a long time before God gave the Jews the Law of Moses. Even Abraham could not become righteous by what he did. Rather, God made Abraham righteous on the basis of Abraham’s faith. Obeying the law of Moses does not make a person righteous. People have always become righteous only by faith. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) Circumcision Circumcision was important to the Israelites. It identified a person as a descendant of Abraham. It was also a sign of the covenant between Abraham and Yahweh. However, being circumcised never made anyone righteous. In this chapter Paul uses “circumcision” to refer to Jews and “uncircumcision” to refer to non-Jews. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]]) Important figures of speech in this chapter Rhetorical Questions In verses 1, 3, and 9–10 Paul continues using rhetorical questions like he did in the previous chapter. He does this in order to answer objections that Jews might make about what he is saying.
612	4:1	q7wc			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Verses 1–12 are a series of rhetorical questions and answers that Paul uses to emphasize that even Abraham, the ancestor of the Jewish people, was made righteous by God “through faith.”
613	4:1	gxv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 3:27–31. See how you translated What then in 3:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
614	4:1	gw29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα?	1	In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using a question to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 3:27–31. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that Abraham, our forefather according to the flesh, has surely discovered something!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
615	4:1	rhrp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα?	1	In this verse and the first part of the next verse, Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
616	4:1	s4b5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐροῦμεν	1	In verses 1–9 Paul uses we exclusively to speak of himself and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “will we Jews say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
617	4:1	ot88		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “that Abraham has discovered, who is our forefather according to the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
618	4:1	fk5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	See how you translated according to the flesh in 1:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
619	4:2	pmua		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	εἰ γὰρ Ἀβραὰμ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἔχει καύχημα	1	These clauses continue the the statements that a Jew might have to against Paul that began in the previous verse. You may need to indicate this with a closing quotation mark at the end of these clauses or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
620	4:2	ka9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows is a the reason for the statement in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This must be the case because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
621	4:2	oe12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & Ἀβραὰμ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἔχει καύχημα	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that the unbelieving Jew might think that this is actually true. In Paul’s time some Jewish teachers taught that Abraham had a right to boast because of his faith. However, since translating this as if it were true might confuse your readers, it is best to use a hypothetical sentence, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
622	4:2	wvmh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Ἀβραὰμ & ἐδικαιώθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God justified Abraham” or “God made Abraham right with himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
623	4:2	sibe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξ ἔργων	1	Paul assumes that his readers would understand that worksmeans “works of the law” as in 3:28. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by doing what God requires from his people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
624	4:2	mefy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀλλ’ οὐ πρὸς Θεόν	1	In this clause Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous clauses and previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘But not before God!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
625	4:2	me3d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’ οὐ πρὸς Θεόν.	1	What follows the word but here is an emphatic contrast to what was just stated. Paul is negating the argument that he presented earlier in this verse and in the previous verse. You could make this emphasis explicit by replacing the period with an exclamation point or another natural way in your language for introducing am emphatic contrast. Alternate translation: “but certainly not before God!” or “however not from God’s perspective!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
626	4:2	z9wx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πρὸς Θεόν	1	Paul speaks figuratively of Abraham as if he were located in the presence of God. He means that Abraham could not boast to God about his righteousness if it was righteous by works. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “from God’s perspective” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
627	4:3	w9i5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in this verse is the reason why Paul said in the previous verse that Abraham cannot boast “before God.” Use a natural way in your language to introduce a reason clause. Alternative translation: “This is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
628	4:3	hih3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί & ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “the scripture surely says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
629	4:3	g1wz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τί & ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει	1	Here Paul uses say figuratively as if the scripture were a person who could speak. He means that the scripture he is about to quote contains information related to the topic he is discussing. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what information is in the scripture” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
630	4:3	r9te		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	τί & ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει?	1	Here Paul uses what does the scripture say to indicate a quotation from an Old Testament book (Genesis 15:6). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what is written in the scripture” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
631	4:3	xdtx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ Γραφὴ	1	Here, the scripture refers specifically to the quotation from Genesis 15:6 that follows in this verse. It does not refer to the Scriptures in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the scripture that Moses wrote in Genesis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
632	4:3	smc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God counted it to him as righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
633	4:3	az65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐλογίσθη	1	The pronoun it refers to Abraham’s faith, which was implied by the statement that Abraham believed God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his faith was counted” or “his trust in God was counted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
634	4:3	qked		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea with a verbal form or another way. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
635	4:4	ihul		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Now here indicates that what follows in verses 4–5 is an explanation of the scripture quotation in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
636	4:4	oojx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	τῷ & ἐργαζομένῳ	1	Here, the one who works refers to a hypothetical person who obeys the laws God gave through Moses and is “made righteous by works” (see verse 2). However, since the meaning of verses 4–5 is given in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
637	4:4	dsl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ μισθὸς οὐ λογίζεται κατὰ χάριν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he does not consider his wage as grace” or “he does not regard his pay as grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
638	4:4	xo4x			κατὰ χάριν & κατὰ ὀφείλημα	1	Alternate translation: “as a matter of grace … as a matter of obligation” or “as a gift … as an obligation”
639	4:4	ossx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ χάριν & κατὰ ὀφείλημα	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of grace and obligation, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “as what is gracious … as what is owed” or “something gifted … something owed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
640	4:5	ynp2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Now here indicates that what follows in this verse is in contrast to what Paul said in the previous verse. Use natural way in your language to express contrasting ideas. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
641	4:5	j3ir		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ & μὴ ἐργαζομένῳ	1	Here, the one who does not work refers to a person who does not obey the laws God gave through Moses. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the one who is does not obey God’s laws” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
642	4:5	fezj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν δικαιοῦντα	1	Here, the one who makes righteous refers to God. If this would your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who justifies” or “God who makes righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
643	4:5	tovp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὸν ἀσεβῆ	1	Paul is using the singular adjective phrase the ungodly as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are ungodly” or “people who do ungodly things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
644	4:5	va3e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λογίζεται ἡ πίστις αὐτοῦ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. See how you translated a similar phrase in verse 3. Alternate translation: “God counted his faith as righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
645	4:5	s00l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ πίστις αὐτοῦ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of faith and righteousness, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “how he trusts … as being righteous” or “how he trusts in God … as being right with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
646	4:6	hil6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καὶ Δαυεὶδ λέγει	1	Paul uses David also speaks of here to introduce a scripture quotation from Psalm 31:1–2, which King David wrote. This occurs in verses 7–8. If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “David also wrote in the Old Testament” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
647	4:6	s0v1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸν μακαρισμὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of blessedness, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “how blessed the man is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
648	4:6	vyse		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸν μακαρισμὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the man that is characterized by blessedness. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the blessed man” or “the happy man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
649	4:6	x40j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	Paul is speaking of people in general, not of one particular man. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
650	4:6	c6zs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ᾧ ὁ Θεὸς λογίζεται δικαιοσύνην χωρὶς ἔργων	1	This phrase gives us further information about the the man. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the man God counts as righteous apart from works” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
651	4:6	lilj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
652	4:6	o260		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	χωρὶς ἔργων	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:28. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
653	4:7	zqwl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	μακάριοι, ὧν ἀφέθησαν αἱ ἀνομίαι καὶ ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1	This verse is the beginning of a quotation from Psalm 31:1–2. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
654	4:7	dur6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	μακάριοι, ὧν ἀφέθησαν αἱ ἀνομίαι καὶ ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1	These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how Blessed these people are. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “How blessed are those people whom God forgives completely for all their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
655	4:7	lq4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὧν & αἱ ἀνομίαι & ὧν & αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of lawless deeds and sins, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the lawless things they have done … the sins they have committed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
656	4:7	d4f4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀφέθησαν & ἐπεκαλύφθησαν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God forgives … God covers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
657	4:7	hj2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι	1	Paul quotes David leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “blessed are those whose sins have been covered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
658	4:7	hqfm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπεκαλύφθησαν	1	Paul quotes David using covered figuratively to refer to God forgiving sins as if he covers sins so that he no longer sees them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “have been forgiven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
659	4:8	jjov		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	μακάριος ἀνὴρ, οὗ οὐ μὴ λογίσηται Κύριος ἁμαρτίαν	1	The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from Psalm 31:1–2. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
660	4:8	yox7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	μακάριος ἀνὴρ, οὗ οὐ μὴ λογίσηται Κύριος ἁμαρτίαν	1	This verse means the same thing as the two clauses in the previous verse. Paul the same thing here, in a slightly different way, to emphasize how Blessed people are home God forgives for their sins. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “How truly blessed is a man whose sin the Lord does certainly not count!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
661	4:8	kpfe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ἀνὴρ	1	Paul quotes David speaking of people in general, not of one particular man. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
662	4:8	y21b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sin, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “sinful deeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
663	4:8	jdrm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ μὴ λογίσηται	1	Paul quotes David using count figuratively to refer to God remembering or regarding people’s sins after he has forgiven them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “does certainly not regard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
664	4:8	yxh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μὴ	1	The phrase certainly not translates two negative words in Greek. Paul quotes David using them together to emphasize how certain it is that God does not regard people’s sin after he has forgiven them. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “never” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
665	4:9	qtgb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Then here introduces a result clause. This verse indicates the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in verses 6–8. Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “As a result,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
666	4:9	g4f6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὁ μακαρισμὸς & οὗτος ἐπὶ τὴν περιτομὴν, ἢ καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “this blessedness is surely upon the circumcision and also upon the uncircumcision!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
667	4:9	alrb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ μακαρισμὸς & οὗτος	1	Here, this blessedness refers to joyful state of those people whom God forgives and makes righteous, as mentioned in verses 6–8. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “is this blessed state of being forgiven by God” or “is this blessed forgiveness from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
668	4:9	jmym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ μακαρισμὸς & οὗτος ἐπὶ τὴν περιτομὴν & ἐπὶ τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν	1	Paul speaks of blessedness figuratively as if it were an object that could be put upon someone. He means that both circumcised and uncircumcised people can receive the blessing of forgiveness from God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is this blessedness given to the circumcision … to the uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
669	4:9	dn7v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	τὴν περιτομὴν & τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν	1	See how you translated these words in 3:30. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
670	4:9	mrsm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1	For here indicates that what follows answers the rhetorical question. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
671	4:9	w2xt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	λέγομεν	1	Here Paul uses we exclusively to refer to Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Jewish people say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
672	4:9	o51f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	λέγομεν	1	Paul uses we say here to introduce a modified scripture quotation from Genesis 15:6, which Moses wrote. If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “we say what Moses wrote in the Old Testament” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
673	4:9	m3uh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη τῷ Ἀβραὰμ ἡ πίστις εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	See how you translated the similar clauses in verses 3 and 5. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
674	4:10	trz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη? ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ?	1	In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to emphasize that Abraham was made righteous without being circumcised. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. You may need to combine these sentences. Alternate translation: “Then you surely know how it was counted to him! You surely know whether it was in circumcision or in uncircumcision!” or “Then you surely know how it was counted to him, whether in circumcision or in uncircumcision!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
675	4:10	unuf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	πῶς οὖν	1	Here, then introduces a result clause that is in the form of a rhetorical question. Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “How as a result” or “So then how” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
676	4:10	uj5i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πῶς	1	How here means “in what circumstances.” Paul is not asking how God made Abraham righteous, but is asking whether or not Abraham was circumcised when God made him righteous. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “In what circumstances” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
677	4:10	bw38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐλογίσθη & οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ	1	In this verse the pronoun it refers to Abraham’s faith, as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was Abraham’s faith counted … His faith was not in circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
678	4:10	p5rp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “How then did God count it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
679	4:10	wbta		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	Here Paul is leaving out some the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Was it counted being in circumcision, or in uncircumcision? It was not counted in circumcision, but in uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
680	4:10	zj6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of circumcision and uncircumcision, you could express the same ideas in verbal way. Paul implies that Abraham is the subject of these sentences. Alternate translation: “While Abraham was circumcised, or while he was uncircumcised? It was not while he was circumcised, but while he was uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
681	4:11	unmg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	περιτομῆς & ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ & δι’ ἀκροβυστίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of circumcision and uncircumcision, you could express the same ideas in verbal way. Alternate translation: “of being circumcised … while being uncircumcised … through being uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
682	4:11	d564		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	σημεῖον & περιτομῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the sign that is circumcision. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the sign that is circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
683	4:11	rjhr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	σφραγῖδα τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῆς πίστεως τῆς ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	This phrase gives us further information about the sign of circumcision. Circumcision is not only a sign, but also a seal. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these clauses clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, a seal of the righteousness of the faith that he had in his uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
684	4:11	wm54		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	σφραγῖδα τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a seal that proves the righteousness to be real. If this is not clear in your language, you could indicate this with a different form. Alternate translation: “a seal that proves the righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
685	4:11	n31z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῆς πίστεως	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe righteousness that comes from faith. If this is not clear in your language, you could indicate this with an adjective phrase or a verbal form. Alternate translation: “of the righteousness from faith” or “of being right with God that comes from trusting in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
686	4:11	zlwg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τῆς ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	This clause gives us further information about the faith that Abraham had. Paul is referring to the faith that Abraham had before he was circumcised. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that Abraham had in his uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
687	4:11	mob7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of uncircumcision as if it were a location someone could be in. He means that Abraham was in the state of being uncircumcised. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while he was uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
688	4:11	f5vv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν	1	Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God required Abraham to become circumcised. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that he would be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
689	4:11	ue6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πατέρα πάντων τῶν πιστευόντων δι’ ἀκροβυστίας	1	Paul uses father figuratively to refer to Abraham as if he physically produced those who believe in God. Paul means that Abraham spiritually represents all uncircumcised non-Jews who trust in God. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “the spiritual representative of all those who believe through uncircumcision” or “like the father of all those who believe through uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
690	4:11	etyl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ ἀκροβυστίας	1	Here the word translated as through refers to a going through a time period. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “during uncircumcision” or “throughout the time they were uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
691	4:11	hm61		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ λογισθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὴν δικαιοσύνην	1	Here, so that indicates that this clause could refer to: (1) the purpose of Abraham being the father of all those who believe. Alternate translation: “in order that the righteousness would be counted to them” (2) the result of Abraham being the father of all those who believe. Alternate translation: “resulting in the righteousness being counted to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
692	4:11	y88e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰς τὸ λογισθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὴν δικαιοσύνην	1	See how you translated counted in verses 3–5 and 9–10. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
693	4:11	ehib		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
694	4:12	v9bu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ πατέρα περιτομῆς	1	Here, and indicates that what follows is another purpose for God commanding Abraham to be circumcised after he trusted in God. If it would be clearer in your language, you could repeat some of the information from the previous sentence and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “and also so that he would be the father of circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
695	4:12	u8j3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πατέρα περιτομῆς & τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν	1	Paul uses father of circumcision here figuratively. He means that Abraham is both the physical ancestor and spiritual ancestor of Jewish people who are both physically circumcised and have the “circumcision of the heart,” which Paul refers to in 2:29. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spiritual representative of those who are physically and spiritually circumcised … our spiritual representative” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
696	4:12	krkf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῖς οὐκ ἐκ περιτομῆς μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1	Paul assumes that his readers will know that these two clauses refer to those Jews who are not only circumcised in their bodies, but also have the same faith in God that Abraham had before he was circumcised. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those Jews who are not only circumcised, but who also follow in the steps of the faith of our father Abraham in uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
697	4:12	s9jt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς & πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1	Here, follow in the steps is an idiom that means to follow someone’s example. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who follow the example of the faith of our father Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
698	4:12	btrd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς & πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the faith that our father Abraham had. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of our father Abraham’s faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
699	4:12	u5ur		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ	1	Here, our refers to Paul and his fellow believing Jews, as in 3:9. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “of our Jewish father Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
700	4:12	ykdc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	Here, in uncircumcision has the same meaning as “through circumcision” stated in the previous verse. See how you translated the phrase there. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
701	4:13	i6xc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here gives the reason why Abraham is the spiritual “father” of both non-Jews and Jews, as stated in verses 11–12. If it would be clearer to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
702	4:13	e0a3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐπαγγελία & τὸ κληρονόμον αὐτὸν εἶναι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of promise and heir, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God promised … that he would inherit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
703	4:13	yqxx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1	Here, the world translated or indicates that the promise is to Abraham and his seed. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
704	4:13	ew13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul uses seed figuratively to refer to “offspring.” Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to his descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
705	4:13	ct1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κόσμου	1	Here the world could refer to: (1) all the land of the world. Although God had promised to give the land of Canaan to Abraham’s descendants, the Jews in Paul’s time understood that this promise included the whole earth. This will indeed take place when Jesus, a descendent of Abraham, rules over the whole world. Alternate expression: “of all the land in the world” (2) the people who live in the world, as in 3:19. Alternate translation: “of the people who live in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
706	4:13	pjyt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ & διὰ νόμου & ἀλλὰ διὰ δικαιοσύνης	1	Here the word translated as through indicates the means by which God gave ** the promise**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was not by means of the law but by means of the righteousness” or “was not on the basis of the law but on the basis of the righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
707	4:13	kquo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	νόμου	1	See how you translated the law in 3:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
708	4:13	iqsm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαιοσύνης πίστεως	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in verse 11. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
709	4:14	hba4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that verses 14–15 give the reasons why God’s promise to Abraham was given “through the righteousness of faith” and not “through the law,” as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
710	4:14	n0x6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	εἰ & οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι, κεκένωται ἡ πίστις	1	Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the serious implications of how people inherit God’s promises. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose the heirs are from the law, then the faith has been emptied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
711	4:14	ksui		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι & ἡ πίστις & ἡ ἐπαγγελία	1	See how you translated “heir”, the law, and faith in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
712	4:14	k4ip		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κληρονόμοι	1	Here, heirs refers to “Abraham” and “his seed” from the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the heirs, Abraham or his seed, are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
713	4:14	w977		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι	1	Here, from the law refers to those who try to obey the Law of Moses. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the heirs are those who try to obey the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
714	4:14	hxvd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κεκένωται ἡ πίστις	1	Paul speaks figuratively of faith as if it were a container that could be emptied. He means that faith would become powerless or useless to make a person righteous if simply obeyingthe law allows a person to inherit God’s promises. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “then it would be impossible to become righteous by trusting in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
715	4:15	v1ow		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that the rest of the verse gives the reason why inheriting God’s promise by obeying the law would nullify faith and the promise, as stated in the previous verse. If it would be clearer to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
716	4:15	qma4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ & νόμος ὀργὴν κατεργάζεται	1	Paul speaks figuratively of the law as if it were a person who could produce something. He means that the law causes God to punish people because they cannot obey it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the law results in wrath for those who do not obey it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
717	4:15	h1x1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὀργὴν	1	See how you translated the same use of this word in 1:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
718	4:15	px0m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὗ δὲ οὐκ ἔστιν νόμος, οὐδὲ παράβασις	1	Paul speaks figuratively of the law and transgression as if they were located in a specific place. Here, where means that God’s law exists. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “but where the law is not present, neither is transgression present” or “but in a place where God’s law does not exist, transgression also does not exist” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
719	4:15	t0wx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	παράβασις	1	See how you translated the same use of this word in 2:23. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
720	4:16	defl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ἐκ πίστεως	1	Here, it refers to the promise mentioned later in the verse and introduced in verse 13. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise is by faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
721	4:16	nchm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ πίστεως	1	Here, by indicates the means by which someone acquires the promise. If this is not clear in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a person acquires God’s promise by faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
722	4:16	bc5k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God makes faith the means for acquiring the promise. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
723	4:16	fvax			κατὰ χάριν	1	Alternate translation: “by grace” or “on the basis of grace”
724	4:16	cgpq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χάριν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “how gracious God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
725	4:16	v8it		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ εἶναι βεβαίαν, τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν	1	Here, so that could indicate: (1) a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order for the promise to be certain” (2) a result clause. Alternate translation: “with the result that the promise might be certain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
726	4:16	qalp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν	1	See how you translated this word in verse 13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
727	4:16	r8ji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	παντὶ τῷ σπέρματι	1	The phrase all the seed is singular but refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “all the descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
728	4:16	xzsp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παντὶ τῷ σπέρματι	1	See how you translated seed in 4:13.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
729	4:16	a4ai		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	οὐ τῷ ἐκ τοῦ νόμου μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῷ ἐκ πίστεως Ἀβραάμ	1	These clauses give us further information about the phrase all the seed. They distinguish between a seed associated with the law and a seed associated with the faith. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “both from those believers associated with Abraham through the law, and those associated with the faith of Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
730	4:16	ns6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ τοῦ νόμου	1	See how you translated this phrase in verse 14. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
731	4:16	qctv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐκ πίστεως Ἀβραάμ	1	Here, from the faith of Abraham refers to those who trust in God the way Abraham did. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who has the same faith as Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
732	4:16	welr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅς ἐστιν πατὴρ πάντων ἡμῶν	1	Paul uses father figuratively to refer to Abraham as if he physically produced all human beings. Paul means that Abraham is the physical ancestor of all believing Jews and the spiritual ancestor of all believing non-Jews. If your readers would not understand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who spiritually represents all of us who believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
733	4:16	kd6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	πάντων ἡμῶν	1	Here, us all refers to all the seed and so is inclusive of all believing Jews and non-Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “of all believers in God” or “of all of us who trust in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
734	4:17	nuj8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καθὼς γέγραπται, ὅτι πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν τέθεικά σε	1	Here Paul interrupts the sentence he began in the previous verse and inserts these two clauses in order to support his argument. If this would confuse your readers, you could mark these clauses in a way that shows they are inserted into the middle of a sentence, as in the UST. You could also move these clauses to the end of the verse so that they do not divide the main sentence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
735	4:17	ibwm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	Here Paul uses a quotation from the Old Testament in order to support the statement in the previous verse that Abraham “is the father of us all.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make the relationship between this verse and the previous verse clearer. Alternate translation: “The fact that Abraham is the father of us all is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
736	4:17	iju4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	Here Paul uses just as it is written to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Genesis 17:5). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “just as it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
737	4:17	sjm0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by Moses. Alternate translation: “just as Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
738	4:17	peaf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν τέθεικά σε	1	In this clause Paul quotes Genesis 17:5. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
739	4:17	mxm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τέθεικά σε & ἐπίστευσεν	1	The pronoun I refers to God, and you and he refer to Abraham. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, have appointed you, Abraham, as … Abraham trusted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
740	4:17	n6l7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν	1	Paul quotes God using father figuratively to refer to Abraham as if he were going to physically produce children who would comprise many nations. God means that Abraham would become the spiritual ancestor of a large amount of people from many nations who trust in God like Abraham. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the spiritual representative of numerous groups of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
741	4:17	ph37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν Θεοῦ,	1	Here Paul continues the sentence from the previous verse that he had interrupted with the first two clauses in this verse. This clause completes the previous statement from the previous verse, “who is the father of us all.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. You made need to start a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “Abraham is the father of us all in the presence of God whom he trusted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
742	4:17	ifwu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατέναντι & Θεοῦ	1	Paul uses in the presence of figuratively to refer to Abraham as if he were physically present with God. Paul means that God personally considers Abraham to represent the believers that come from many nations. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “according to what God thinks” or “in God’s view” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
743	4:17	s67j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	οὗ ἐπίστευσεν & τοῦ ζῳοποιοῦντος τοὺς νεκροὺς, καὶ καλοῦντος τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα	1	These clauses give further information about God. If this might confuse your readers, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer by making new sentences or by another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This is the God whom he trusted. It is this God who makes the dead live and calls the things not existing as existing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
744	4:17	tg2e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καλοῦντος τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα	1	Paul speaks figuratively of the things not existing as if God were calling to them. Paul means that God creates things by commanding them to exist, as Moses describes in Genesis 1:3–27. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “summons into being things that did not previously exist” or “by speaking creates things that did not previously exist” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
745	4:18	emih		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃς & αὐτὸν & σου	1	The pronouns who and he and your refer to Abraham, not God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
746	4:18	g8fm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν	1	Here, against hope is an idiom meaning “what seems hopeless.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “although it seemed hopeless, he believed on the basis of hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
747	4:18	auah		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hope, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “who hopefully believed although it seemed hopeless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
748	4:18	n62i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐπίστευσεν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “believed in God” or “believed what God had promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
749	4:18	bs6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι αὐτὸν	1	Here, so that indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the result of Abraham believing on the basis of hope. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “which resulted in him becoming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
750	4:18	qbdq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν	1	See how you translated this phrase in verse 17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
751	4:18	b92q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	τὸ εἰρημένον	1	Here Paul uses what was said to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Genesis 15:5). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what was said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
752	4:18	cryi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ εἰρημένον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was spoken by God. Alternate translation: “what God said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
753	4:18	p5el		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὕτως ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα σου	1	Paul assumes that his readers would know the rest of what God said in the verse he is quoting (Genesis 15:5). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Look now at the heavens and count the stars, if you are able to count them. So will your seed be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
754	4:18	i2ev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ σπέρμα	1	See how you translated seed in verse 16.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
755	4:19	ycte		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καὶ μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει, κατενόησεν τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σῶμα ἤδη νενεκρωμένον, ἑκατονταετής που ὑπάρχων, καὶ τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “He considered his own body as already having died (being about a hundred years old)—and the deadness of the womb of Sarah—but he was not weakening in the faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
756	4:19	m9gq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	καὶ μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει	1	Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “And being strengthened in the faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
757	4:19	s6u1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει	1	Paul speaks figuratively of Abraham’s faith as if it were something that a person could be weakening in. He means that Abraham kept trusting God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not ceasing to trust” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
758	4:19	b3w6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πίστει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “in how he trusted God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
759	4:19	bn9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἤδη νενεκρωμένον	1	Paul speaks figuratively of Abraham as if he actually thought his body was dead. Paul means that Abraham knew he was too old to produce a child. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “unable to father a child” or “useless for procreating” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
760	4:19	bfsr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἑκατονταετής που ὑπάρχων	1	Here Paul provides background information about Abraham’s age to help his readers understand why Abraham considered his own body as already being dead. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “since he was about one hundred years old” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
761	4:19	hro2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας	1	Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “he also considered the deadness of the womb of Sarah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
762	4:19	ghhm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of deadness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that the womb of Sarah was dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
763	4:19	qil5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας	1	Paul speaks figuratively of Sarah’s womb as if it were dead. He means that she was unable to conceive children. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “how Sarah was unable to conceive” or “that Sarah could not bear children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
764	4:19	yx92		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας	1	Paul assumes that his readers would know that Sarah had been unable to become pregnant throughout her life, as described in the Old Testament book of Genesis. This fact makes Abraham’s faith even more amazing. If your readers would be unfamiliar with the story of Abraham and Sarah, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the deadness of the womb of Sarah, since she could never become pregnant before” or “the deadness of the womb of Sarah, which had always been dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
765	4:20	qn5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εἰς δὲ τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Abraham did not waver in unbelief about what God promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
766	4:20	kicf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	But here indicates that what follows emphasizes Abraham’s faith in the promise of God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
767	4:20	o3zu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς & τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The word translated as toward could also mean “with regard to” or “regarding.” If it might be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “with regard to the promise of God” or “regarding the promise of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
768	4:20	qcod		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the promise that comes from God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the promise that came from God” or “the promise from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
769	4:20	wgmc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of promise, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “the things God promised” or “the things God said would happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
770	4:20	ep2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	Here, did not waver and unbelief form a double negative expression. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “he did not waver in belief” or “his belief did not waver” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
771	4:20	th2x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ & τῇ πίστει	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of the unbelief and the faith, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “by distrusting … by trusting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
772	4:20	zdj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God strengthened him in the faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
773	4:20	a4g4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει	1	Paul speaks figuratively of Abraham’s faith as if it were something that a person could be strengthened in. He means that God enabled Abraham to continue trusting him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “was enabled to keep on trusting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
774	4:20	ew3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δοὺς δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “having glorified God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
775	4:21	y2sh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πληροφορηθεὶς	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God fully convinced him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
776	4:21	plbf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐπήγγελται & ἐστιν	1	The pronoun he refers to God, not Abraham. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God had promised, God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
777	4:21	j12r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃ ἐπήγγελται	1	Here, what he had promised refers to the promise Paul describes in verse 13. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the things God promised to Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
778	4:22	ympp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ καὶ	1	Here, therefore introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “And for this reason” or “And this is the reason why” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
779	4:22	wlnh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	This clause is a quotation from Genesis 15:6. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
780	4:22	i56a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	See how you translated this in verse 3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
781	4:23	zdc0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἐγράφη & δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον, ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases and combine them. Alternate translation: “Now the phrase ‘it was counted to him,’ was not written only for his sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
782	4:23	r65c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν & αὐτῷ	1	The pronouns his and him refer to Abraham. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham’s … to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
783	4:23	bfiw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐγράφη & δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Moses wrote the quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses did not write it only for Abraham’s sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
784	4:23	bmlm			δι’ αὐτὸν	1	Alternate translation: “for him” or “regarding him”
785	4:23	ae1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ,	1	This clause is a quotation from Genesis 15:6. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
786	4:23	jft0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ	1	See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
787	4:24	pfc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	δι’ ἡμᾶς, οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Here, our and whom refer to all those who believe in Jesus. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “for the sake us believers who are about to be counted, to we who believe in the one who raised from the dead ones Jesus, the Lord of us all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
788	4:24	ffdm			δι’ ἡμᾶς	1	See how you translated “for his sake” in the previous verse.
789	4:24	nh4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “to whom God is about to count it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
790	4:24	bu1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	μέλλει	1	Here the pronoun it refers to the “faith” mentioned in verses 5 and 20. Previously it referred to Abraham’s faith, but in this verse it refers to our faith. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “our faith is about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
791	4:24	mujr			λογίζεσθαι	1	See how you translated counted in the previous verse.
792	4:24	artt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	This clause refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who raised Jesus our Lord from the dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
793	4:24	i6vl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν	1	Here, raised is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who caused Jesus our Lord to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
794	4:24	iq69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Here, the phrase translated the dead ones refers to dead people. Here it means that Jesus physically died and was buried. If your language has a word or phrase for the place that dead people go, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “from the place where dead people are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
795	4:25	irue		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃς & ἡμῶν & τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν	1	Here the pronoun who refers to Jesus, and our refers to all “those who believe” in him, as mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus … we believers’ … the justification of us believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
796	4:25	cca1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς παρεδόθη & ἠγέρθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up … God raised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
797	4:25	b999		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃς παρεδόθη	1	Paul speaks figuratively of Jesus as if he were a thing that could be given up to another person. Paul means that God allowed people to arrest and kill Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who was allowed to be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
798	4:25	op41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν & διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of trespasses and justification, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because we trespassed … to make us righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
799	4:25	imvc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν	1	Here Paul uses for the sake of differently than he did in verses 23–24. Here Paul uses this phrase to indicate the reason why Jesus was given up. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of our trespasses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
800	4:25	gmbd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἠγέρθη	1	See how you translated raised in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
801	4:25	hzop		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν	1	Here Paul uses for the sake of differently than he did in the first part of this verse. Here Paul uses this phrase to indicate one of the purposes for Jesus being raised. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of our justification” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
802	5:intro	i1dt				0	Romans 5 General Notes Structure and formatting Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21) God’s righteousness is received through faith (3:21–26) No one can boast in works (3:27–31) The examples of Abraham and David (4:1–25) The blessings of justification (5:1–11) Adam and Christ are compared (5:12–5:21) Special concepts in this chapter The second Adam Adam was the first man and the first “son” of God. He was created by God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. In this chapter Paul describes Jesus as the “second Adam” and the true son of God. Jesus brings eternal life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/other/death]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter In this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people those who have been “justified by faith” in verse 1. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
803	5:1	age4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1	Therefore, here marks a new section of the letter. It also introduces a result clause that summarizes the blessed results of a person becoming righteous by trusting in Jesus, which Paul just discussed in 1:18–4:25. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “Since all these things are true” or “As a result of everything that I have just told you being true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
804	5:1	xmp3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	δικαιωθέντες & ἐκ πίστεως, εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Let us have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, because we have been justified by faith” or “We can have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, since we have been justified by faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
805	5:1	xott		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιωθέντες	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “because God makes us righteous” or “since God makes us right with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
806	5:1	wbwx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ πίστεως	1	See how you translated this phrase in 4:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
807	5:1	ldru		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν	1	Some ancient copies say “we have peace,” which makes sense, since verses 1–5 are a list of blessings that belong to those people who have been justified by faith. If the reading let us have peace is correct, this phrase may be indicating Paul’s desire that his fellow believers continue to experience the peace they have with God. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
808	5:1	kjpb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἔχωμεν	1	Paul uses the phrase let us have peace to exhort his Christian readers to continue living peacefully with God. It is not a command. This phrase does not imply that those who have been justified by faith do not yet have peace with God. Use a form in your language that communicates an exhortation. Alternate translation: “we must continue to have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
809	5:1	hi12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea with a verbal form, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
810	5:1	o2yr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν	1	Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they could possess or own peace. He means that they can live peacefully with God. If your readers would not understand what have peace means in this context, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “let us live in a peaceful manner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
811	5:1	s6xd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἔχωμεν & ἡμῶν	1	Here and throughout this chapter the pronouns us and our inclusively refer to all those having been justified by faith in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “let us believers … our” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
812	5:1	xaeg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, through indicates that our Lord Jesus Christ is the means by which believers have peace with God. This refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to have peace with God, as briefly mentioned in 4:25. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through what our Lord Jesus Christ did for us” or “which was caused by our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
813	5:2	slyh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δι’ οὗ καὶ τὴν προσαγωγὴν ἐσχήκαμεν, τῇ πίστει εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην, ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of access, faith, or grace, you could express the same ideas another way. Alternate translation: “through whom we also access and stand in how gracious God is by trusting in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
814	5:2	tsbo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗ	1	The pronoun whom refers to “our Lord Jesus Christ,” as mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
815	5:2	i50u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καὶ & ἐσχήκαμεν & ἑστήκαμεν & καυχώμεθα	1	The pronoun we in this verse refers inclusively to all believers in Christ. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “we believers also have … we believers stand … we believers boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
816	5:2	af0n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην, ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν	1	Paul speaks figuratively of grace as if it were a location that someone could access and stand within. He means that trusting in Jesus allows believers to confidently experience how gracious God is toward his people. If your readers would not understand this, you express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to confidently experience how kind God is” or “to safely experience how gracious God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
817	5:2	dxcu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καυχώμεθα ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **hope and glory, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “we may boast because we are confident that we will be glorified with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
818	5:2	zp5p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using possessive forms to describe how glory relates to God. This could refer to: (1) the glory that God shares with believers. This was the same glory that God shared with humans when he created them, but which they lost when the first humans sinned, as mentioned in 3:23. Alternate translation: “of sharing in the glory God has” or “of the glory from God” (2) glorifying God, as in the similar phrase “the glory of the imperishable God” in 1:23. Alternate translation: “of glorifying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
819	5:3	q5p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐ μόνον δέ	1	The pronoun this here refers to boasting about “the hope of the glory of God,” as mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And we not only boast on the basis of the hope of the glory of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
820	5:3	c644		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ καυχώμεθα ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν	1	Here, in our sufferings could mean: (1) believers can boast about their sufferings. Alternate translation: “we can also boast about our sufferings” (2) believers can boast while they are experiencing sufferings. Alternate translation: “we can also boast when we are distressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
821	5:3	xeak		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰδότες	1	Here, knowing indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse are the reasons why believers can boast in our sufferings. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “since we know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
822	5:3	c0rl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν & ἡ θλῖψις & ὑπομονὴν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of sufferings, suffering, and endurance, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “when we suffer … when we suffer … a way to endure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
823	5:3	vmbf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany	ἡ θλῖψις ὑπομονὴν κατεργάζεται	1	Paul uses a repetitive series of clauses in this clause and the next verse to show how many reasons there are for Christians to boast about their suffering. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list a series of reasons for something. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
824	5:3	lo57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ θλῖψις ὑπομονὴν κατεργάζεται	1	Paul speaks figuratively of endurance as if it were an object that could be produced. He means that when Christians trust in God while suffering, they develop greater endurance than they had before experiencing suffering. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “this suffering helps us know how to endure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
825	5:4	w7c2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἡ δὲ ὑπομονὴ δοκιμήν, ἡ δὲ δοκιμὴ ἐλπίδα	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and endurance produces character, and this character produces hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
826	5:4	dt8w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & ὑπομονὴ	1	See how you translated endurance in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
827	5:4	gjvh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δοκιμήν, ἡ δὲ δοκιμὴ	1	The word translated character refers specifically to someone who has been approved by God because they have successfully endured testing. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of character, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “makes us approved by God, and when God approves us it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
828	5:4	eh9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐλπίδα	1	See how you translated hope in verse 2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
829	5:5	u4xh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἡ δὲ ἐλπὶς οὐ καταισχύνει, ὅτι ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “And because the love of God has been poured into our hearts through the Holy Spirit, who has been given to us, that hope does not disappoint” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
830	5:5	rctz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ δὲ ἐλπὶς	1	Here, that hope refers to the hope of the glory of God in verse 2. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And being confident in God’s glory” or “And the hope of the glory of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
831	5:5	qka8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅτι ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν	1	Paul speaks figuratively of love as if it were something that could be poured out of a container, and speaks figurative of our hearts as though they were containers that could be filled. He means that the Holy Spirit has completely revealed to God’s people how much God loves them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “because the Holy Spirit, who was given to us, has deeply revealed how much God loves his people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
832	5:5	dc95		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, who God gave us, has poured the love of God into our hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
833	5:5	clmb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe how love relates to God. Here, the love of God could refer to: (1) God’s love for us. Alternate translation: “God’s love” or “God’s love for us” (2) our love for God. Alternate translation: “love for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
834	5:5	glt1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν	1	See how you translated this word in 1:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
835	5:6	x5eg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in verses 6–8 explains “the love of God” in verse 5. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
836	5:6	a7s7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἔτι & ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθενῶν	1	In this clause Paul is describing something that was true during the time period he is describing in the rest of the verse. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “during the time we were still being weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
837	5:6	xqr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔτι & ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθενῶν	1	Here, weak means that people are completely unable to make themselves righteous. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we still being powerless to make ourselves righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
838	5:6	xl85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὲρ ἀσεβῶν	1	Here, ungodly ones refers to we mentioned earlier in the verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on behalf of us ungodly ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
839	5:7	o92c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains how surprising it is that Christ would die on the behalf of ungodly sinners, as stated in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
840	5:7	h089		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	μόλις γὰρ & τις ἀποθανεῖται & γὰρ & τάχα τις	1	Paul uses someone twice in this verse to indicate two hypothetical situations. He does this to help his readers recognize how rare it is for someone to voluntarily die on behalf of another person. Use the natural form in your language for expressing hypothetical situations. Alternate translation: “Let us consider how rare it would be for someone to die … Let us, though, suppose that just maybe someone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
841	5:7	x60d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	γὰρ & τάχα τις	2	What follows the word though here is in contrast to what Paul stated in the previous sentence. Although someone will hardly die for a righteous person, someone might possibly be willing to die for a good person. Although Paul does not state the difference between a righteous person and a good person, he contrasts both examples to emphasize how unlikely it is for a person to die on the behalf of another person. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “By contrast, perhaps someone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
842	5:7	mqyq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ τολμᾷ ἀποθανεῖν	1	Paul speaks figuratively of dying as if it were a dare or challenge for someone to overcome. He means that someone would be brave enough to give their life for the sake of someone else. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “might even be willing to die” or “would even be brave enough to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
843	5:8	qh0h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἑαυτοῦ	1	Paul uses the word his own to emphasize how much God loves his people. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “his very own” or “his personal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
844	5:8	vh6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀγάπην εἰς ἡμᾶς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of love, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how much God loves us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
845	5:8	c8vd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν	1	In this clause Paul is describing something that was true during the time period he is describing in the rest of the verse. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “during the time we were still being sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
846	5:8	fel5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν, Χριστὸς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἀπέθανεν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Christ died for us, while we were still being sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
847	5:8	w7hy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἁμαρτωλῶν	1	Paul is using the adjective sinners as a plural noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who lived sinfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
848	5:9	vnxd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	πολλῷ οὖν μᾶλλον	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is the result of what Paul described in verses 6–8. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “As a result, much more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
849	5:9	tewt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	πολλῷ οὖν μᾶλλον	1	Much more then here strongly emphasizes that what follows is another important result of what Christ did for us. Use a natural way in your language to express strong emphasis. Alternate translation: “It is then much more certain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
850	5:9	zp4v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	δικαιωθέντες νῦν ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ	1	This clause states the reason why we can be much more certain that we will be saved. Use the most natural way in your language to express a reason clause. Alternate translation: “because we have now been justified by his blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
851	5:9	x9yi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιωθέντες νῦν ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his blood having now justified us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
852	5:9	nvs3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ	1	See how you translated his blood in 3:25. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
853	5:9	jbaz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθησόμεθα δι’ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will save us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
854	5:9	bev3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὀργῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of the wrath, you could use a different expression. Here, the wrath refers specifically to “the day of wrath”, which is mentioned in 2:5. Alternate translation: “the Final Judgment” or “from when God finally judges sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
855	5:10	wply		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an alternate expression. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
856	5:10	mz06		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & ἐχθροὶ ὄντες	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since being enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
857	5:10	rnc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηλλάγημεν τῷ Θεῷ διὰ τοῦ θανάτου τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the death of his Son reconciled us to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
858	5:10	cu3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Son is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
859	5:10	o1m6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	πολλῷ μᾶλλον	1	Here, much more strongly emphasizes that what follows is an important result of having been reconciled with God. See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “it is much more certain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
860	5:10	n817		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καταλλαγέντες	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express this idea with an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he having reconciled us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
861	5:10	e4ug		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καταλλαγέντες	1	This clause states the reason why we can be much more certain that we will be saved. Use the most natural way in your language to express a reason clause. Alternate translation: “because we have been reconciled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
862	5:10	tmxf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθησόμεθα ἐν τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express this idea with an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his life will save us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
863	5:10	gcto		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	σωθησόμεθα	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the similar statement in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “we will be saved when God finally judges people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
864	5:10	eeo4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ	1	Here life implies the life that Jesus has after God made him alive again. This resurrection life showed that God had accepted Jesus’ death as the payment for the sins of everyone who trusts in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ life after God caused him to become alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
865	5:10	b3z4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of life, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “him being alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
866	5:11	a0vk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐ μόνον δέ	1	The pronoun this could refer to: (1) what Paul said in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Not only are we saved by his life, but” (2) what Paul said in verses 2–10. Alternate translation: “Not only are all these things true, but” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
867	5:11	zp36		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ καυχώμενοι ἐν τῷ Θεῷ	1	Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were boasting inside of God. Paul means that these believers in Christ boast about how great God is. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we also are boasting about how great God is” or “we also are boasting because of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
868	5:11	uukm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, through indicates that our Lord Jesus Christ is the means by which believers can boast. This refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to be able to boast. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through what our Lord Jesus Christ did for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
869	5:11	r0zj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ οὗ νῦν τὴν καταλλαγὴν ἐλάβομεν	1	Here, through indicates that Jesus is the means by which believers have received the reconciliation. This refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to have peace with God, as briefly mentioned in 4:25. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through what he did for us that caused us to receive the reconciliation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
870	5:11	xjes		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	νῦν τὴν καταλλαγὴν ἐλάβομεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of reconciliation, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “we have now been reconciled with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
871	5:12	hjx4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	διὰ τοῦτο	1	For this reason here indicates that what follows in verses 12–21 is Paul’s explanation of the relationship between human sin and God’s grace. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Because of this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
872	5:12	wf9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὥσπερ δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου ἡ ἁμαρτία εἰς τὸν κόσμον εἰσῆλθεν, καὶ διὰ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος; καὶ οὕτως εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους ὁ θάνατος διῆλθεν	1	Here Paul speaks of sin and death figuratively as if they were objects that could enter a place or spread within people. Paul means that the way God intended for the world and human beings to function became thoroughly corrupted by sin and death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “just as through one man sinned began to exist in the world, and that sin would result in that man’s death, so also all men born after that man would die too” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
873	5:12	pa8s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου	1	Paul uses the phrase one man to refer to Adam, the first human being. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly, as in verse14. Alternate translation: “through the first man Adam” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
874	5:12	smc2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἁμαρτία & τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος; καὶ οὕτως & ὁ θάνατος	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of sin and death, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “sinful things … sinful things, living things could die, so also the ability to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
875	5:12	uxcs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	διὰ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and through sin death entered into the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
876	5:12	xhbv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπους	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
877	5:12	jy25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐφ’ ᾧ πάντες ἥμαρτον	1	Here the pronoun which could refer to: (1) the fact that Paul states in the next phrase. Alternate translation: “because of this fact, namely, that all sinned” (2) the one man mentioned earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “because of the one man all sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
878	5:12	si2i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντες	1	Paul is using the adjective all as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all men” or “all humanity” or “all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
879	5:13	at4i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in verses 13–14 explains how death and sin existed before the law. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
880	5:13	e6bx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἄχρι γὰρ νόμου & μὴ ὄντος νόμου	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “For until the law came … when there was no law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
881	5:13	abjg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμου & νόμου	1	In this verse law refers to the laws that God gave the Jews through Moses. See how you translated law in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
882	5:13	v51t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτία & ἁμαρτία	1	See how you translated sin in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
883	5:13	uyd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἁμαρτία ἦν ἐν κόσμῳ	1	Here Paul speaks of sin figuratively as if it were an object that could exist in a place. Paul means that people sinned in the world before God gave his laws to Moses. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people sinned in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
884	5:13	juq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἁμαρτία & οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται	2	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God did not charge them with sinning” or “God did not reckon it as sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
885	5:13	izno			ἁμαρτία & οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται	2	Alternate translation: “a record of sin is not kept” or “no account is kept of sins”
886	5:13	v5l9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	μὴ ὄντος νόμου	1	Here, being could indicate: (1) the reason why sin is not charged. Alternate translation: “because there was no law” (2) the time when sin is not charged. Alternate translation: “when there was no law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
887	5:13	j04c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ ὄντος νόμου	1	Here, no law implies that God had not yet given people his laws that could help them identify what sin is. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “being no law to identify to people what sin is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
888	5:14	bd3q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐβασίλευσεν ὁ θάνατος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως, καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς	1	Here, death is spoken of figuratively as though it were a king who ruled over people. Paul means that nobody could prevent themselves from dying. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no human could escape dying from Adam until Moses, even those” or “human life inevitably ended in death from Adam until Moses, even the lives of those” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
889	5:14	u66m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁ θάνατος	1	See how you translated death in verse 12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
890	5:14	pdrh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως	1	Here, Adam refers to the period of time when Adam lived and Moses refers to the period of time when Moses lived. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the time when Adam lived until the time when Moses lived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
891	5:14	w24g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς μὴ ἁμαρτήσαντας ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ	1	This phrase gives us further information about over whom death ruled. It is not making a distinction between those who lived during the time of Adam and Moses. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “even over the people who did not disobey God in the same way that Adam did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
892	5:14	skns		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ, ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of likeness, transgression, and pattern, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Adam transgressed, who typifies the one who is coming” or “exactly how Adam transgressed, who resembles the one who is coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
893	5:14	k2w7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the likeness relates to the transgression. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “like Adam’s transgression” or “in the same way Adam transgressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
894	5:14	e4ze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Ἀδάμ, ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος	1	Paul speaks figuratively of Adam as if he were a model or pattern. Paul means that Adam’s role is similar to the role of the one who is coming because both people do things that affect all human beings. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Adam, who is a replica of the one who is coming” or “Adam, who models the one who is coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
895	5:14	mu4s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ μέλλοντος	1	The phrase the one who is coming refers to Jesus. Paul means that Adam represents the ideal human being, Jesus, who would come in the future. If this is not clear in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “representing Jesus who would come in the future” or “prefiguring Jesus who was destined to come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
896	5:15	x37x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ παράπτωμα & τὸ χάρισμα & τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι & ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of trespass, gracious gift, grace, and gift, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “how Adam trespassed … what God graciously gave … when the one man trespassed … how gracious God is and what he graciously gave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
897	5:15	ieb0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οὐχ ὡς τὸ παράπτωμα, οὕτως καὶ τὸ χάρισμα	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “the gracious gift is not like the trespass” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
898	5:15	sful		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows explains the difference between the trespass and the gracious gift. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
899	5:15	yxej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of the gracious gift are superior to the consequences of the trespass. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
900	5:15	kdhb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the trespass that was committed by the one man. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “by one man’s trespass” or “because one man trespassed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
901	5:15	mm6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῦ ἑνὸς	1	Paul is using the adjective phrase the one as a noun in order to refer to Adam, as in the previous verse. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could make these references explicit. Alternate translation: “of Adam, the one man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
902	5:15	e9me		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ πολλοὶ & τοὺς πολλοὺς	1	Here Paul is using the adjective many as a noun in order to describe a large group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
903	5:15	h6c3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	πολλῷ μᾶλλον	1	Here, how much more strongly emphasizes the difference between the results of the trespass of Adam and the grace of God that comes through Jesus Christ. Use a natural way in your language to express strong emphasis. Alternate translation: “even more certainly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
904	5:15	tfhj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι, τῇ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, εἰς τοὺς πολλοὺς ἐπερίσσευσεν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “abounded to the many the grace of God and the gift by the grace of the one man, Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
905	5:15	ejxz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe grace that comes from God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s grace” or “the grace from God” or “how kind God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
906	5:15	wn36		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the grace that comes from the one man. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “from the one man” or “associated with the one man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
907	5:16	ns9a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ οὐχ ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος, τὸ δώρημα; τὸ μὲν γὰρ κρίμα ἐξ ἑνὸς, εἰς κατάκριμα, τὸ δὲ χάρισμα ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων, εἰς δικαίωμα	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “Indeed, because the judgment came from one man unto condemnation, but the gift came from many trespasses unto justification. This is why the gift is not the same as through the one man who sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
908	5:16	rmpt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ δώρημα & τὸ δὲ χάρισμα	1	See how you translated these two phrases in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
909	5:16	ok2k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as what came through one who sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
910	5:16	muum		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος	1	Here, one who sinned refers to Adam, as mentioned in verses 12–15. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Adam, the one who sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
911	5:16	ub9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ & κρίμα	2	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of judgment, you could express the same idea in another way, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
912	5:16	eusx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξ ἑνὸς	1	Here, one refers to the one sin Adam committed. It does not refer to Adam himself, as the previous one does. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from Adam’s trespass” or “from the sin Adam committed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
913	5:16	xza3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐξ ἑνὸς	1	Here, from one could indicate: (1) that the judgment happened after the one trespass. Alternate translation: “after one” (2) that the judgment happened because of the one trespass. Alternate translation: “because of one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
914	5:16	t4t8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς κατάκριμα & παραπτωμάτων, εἰς δικαίωμα	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of condemnation, trespasses, and justification, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to cause God to condemn … sinful deeds people have done, to cause God to justify” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
915	5:16	s82t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς κατάκριμα	1	Here, to indicates that was follows is the result of God’s judgment. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “resulted in condemnation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
916	5:16	m5k4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων	1	Here, from many trespasses could indicate: (1) that the gracious gift happened after many trespasses. Alternate translation: “after many trespasses” (2) that the gracious gift happened because of many trespasses. Alternate translation: “because of many trespasses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
917	5:16	jarb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς δικαίωμα	1	Here, to indicates that was follows is the result of God’s gracious gift. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “resulted in justification” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
918	5:17	n5zx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows further explains the difference between the trespass and the gift, as discussed in verses15–16. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
919	5:17	mhtc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of the gift are superior to the consequences of the trespass. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
920	5:17	lcyd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι	1	See how you translated this phrase in verse 15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
921	5:17	whbf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῦ ἑνὸς & τοῦ ἑνός & τοῦ ἑνὸς	1	See how you translated the first occurrence of one in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
922	5:17	yvq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι, ὁ θάνατος & τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης & ἐν ζωῇ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because the one man trespassed, the fact that people die … how abundantly kind God is and how he makes people righteous … by living” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
923	5:17	kz6z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ θάνατος ἐβασίλευσεν	1	See how you translated this phrase in verse 14. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
924	5:17	mtr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦ ἑνός	1	Here, through indicates that the one is the reason why death ruled. Use an expression in your language that indicates a reason. Alternate translation: “because of the one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
925	5:17	lf7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	πολλῷ μᾶλλον	1	See how you translated this phrase in verses 10 and 15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
926	5:17	hfvt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν, διὰ τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ.	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “through the one man Jesus Christ will … rule in life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
927	5:17	xy6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ & ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν	1	Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were kings who rule in a location called life. This could mean: (1) they will have control over their sinful desires while physically alive. Alternate translation: “will those … have control over their sinfulness while alive” (2) they will rule with Jesus Christ while living eternally. Alternative translation: “will those … rule and live eternally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
928	5:17	nr25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης λαμβάνοντες	1	This clause describes the people who will rule in life. It is not making a distinction between those who receive and those who rule. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “those who receive the abundance of the grace and the gift of the righteousness as well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
929	5:17	fodc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος & λαμβάνοντες	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe abundance that relates to grace. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “those who receive God’s abundant grace” or “those who experience how abundantly gracious God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
930	5:17	o8c3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe how righteousness is a gift. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “the gift, which is being made righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
931	5:17	ehbk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, through indicates that the one, Jesus Christ is the reason why his people will rule in life. Use an expression in your language that indicates a reason. Alternate translation: “because of the one, Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
932	5:17	uifs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	The phrase the one, Jesus Christ refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to rule in life. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what the one, Jesus Christ has done for them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
933	5:18	e7cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἄρα οὖν ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς παραπτώματος, εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους εἰς κατάκριμα, οὕτως καὶ δι’ ἑνὸς δικαιώματος, εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους εἰς δικαίωσιν ζωῆς	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “So then, as one man trespassed and this trespass caused all men to become condemned, so also one man acted righteously and this act caused all men to become justified for living eternally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
934	5:18	mccf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1	So then indicates that what follows in verses 18–21 summarizes the ideas of verses 12–17. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a clearer expression. Alternate translation: “Finally” or “In summary” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
935	5:18	sfwg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	δι’ & δι’	1	See how you translated through in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
936	5:18	z0jq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	παραπτώματος & κατάκριμα & δικαίωσιν	1	See how you translated these abstracts nouns in verse 16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
937	5:18	n8pr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πάντας ἀνθρώπους & πάντας ἀνθρώπους	2	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. See how your translated all men in verse 12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
938	5:18	bcm2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	δικαίωσιν ζωῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe how justification relates to life. This could mean: (1) justification that leads to life. Alternate translation: “justification that brings eternal life” (2) justification that is life. Alternate translation: “justification, which is eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
939	5:18	bmey		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζωῆς	1	Here, life refers to “eternal life.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of eternal life” or “for living forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
940	5:19	hj69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
941	5:19	sjek		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ & οὕτως καὶ	1	See how you translated the similar connective words as and so also in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
942	5:19	rgji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ & διὰ	1	See how you translated through in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
943	5:19	z8r8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς παρακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου & τῆς ὑπακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of disobedience and obedience, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. You may need to supply an object for the verbs, such as “God” or “God’s command.” Alternate translation: “the one man disobeying God … the one man obeying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
944	5:19	qpsm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου	1	Here, the one man refers to “Adam.” See how you translated the similar use of one man in verse 12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
945	5:19	q8lj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διὰ τῆς παρακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, ἁμαρτωλοὶ κατεστάθησαν οἱ πολλοί	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the disobedience of the one man caused many to become sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
946	5:19	huig		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ πολλοί & οἱ πολλοί	2	See how you translated the many in verse 15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
947	5:19	px2r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἁμαρτωλοὶ	1	See how you translated sinners in verse 8. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
948	5:19	bhra		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διὰ τῆς ὑπακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς, δίκαιοι κατασταθήσονται οἱ πολλοί	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the obedience of the one caused many to become righteous ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
949	5:19	haks		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ ἑνὸς	2	Here, the one refers to “Jesus Christ.” See how you translated the third occurrence of **the one ** in verse 17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
950	5:20	lah6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμος	1	See how you translated the law in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
951	5:20	w958		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	παρεισῆλθεν	1	The word translated slipped in can mean to sneak in unnoticed, as in Jude 1:4. Paul may be stressing how the coming of the law was like an unwelcome person secretly intruding at some location. If this is confusing in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “intruded like a person sneaking in unnoticed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
952	5:20	ttcw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ παράπτωμα & ἡ ἁμαρτία & ἡ χάρις	1	See how you translated the abstract nouns trespass in verses 15–18, sin in verses 12–13, and grace in verses 15 and 17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
953	5:20	relk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα & ἐπλεόνασεν ἡ ἁμαρτία, ὑπερεπερίσσευσεν ἡ χάρις	1	Paul speaks figuratively of the trespass, sin, and grace as if they were objects that could increase in amount. He means that the power or influence of these concepts expanded throughout humanity. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the trespass might be more evident … sin became more evident, the grace became even more obvious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
954	5:20	wbh3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα	1	This clause could refer to: (1) one of God’s purposes for giving the law. Alternate translation: “in order to increase the trespass” (2) the result of God giving the law. Alternate translation (with preceding comma): “resulting in the trespass increasing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
955	5:20	godn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὗ	1	Here Paul uses where figuratively to refer to sin and grace as if they were located somewhere. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “when” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
956	5:21	ycy7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The phrase so that here introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God caused grace to abound, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
957	5:21	ymxy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ & οὕτως καὶ	1	See how you translated just as and so also in the verse 19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
958	5:21	leu9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ & ἡ χάρις & δικαιοσύνης & ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	See how you translated the abstract nouns sin and grace in the previous verse, death and righteousness in verse 17, and eternal life in 2:7. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
959	5:21	wmy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐβασίλευσεν ἡ ἁμαρτία	1	Here, sin is spoken of figuratively as if it were a king ruling over people. Paul means that everyone was controlled by their sinful desires. While death ruled in verse 14, sin ruled after God gave the law. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone was controlled by sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
960	5:21	wuh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ	1	Here, in death could refer to: (1) the location in which sin ruled. Alternate translation: “in the place where death exists” (2) the means by which sin ruled. Alternate translation: “by means of death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
961	5:21	kc21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης	1	Here, grace is spoken of figuratively as if it were a king ruling over people. Paul means that God’s grace allows people to become righteous. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how gracious God is might make people become righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
962	5:21	bk72		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ & διὰ	1	See how you translated through in the verses 17–19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
963	5:21	c9nj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	Here, to indicates that was follows is the result of God’s grace ruling through righteousness. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “resulted in eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
964	5:21	axr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	The phrase Jesus Christ our Lord refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to have eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what Jesus Christ our Lord has done for them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
965	6:intro	v522				0	Romans 6 General Notes Structure and formatting Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39) Baptism represents union with Christ’s death (6:1–14) Christians are now slaves of righteousness (6:15–23) Special concepts in this chapter Slavery In this chapter Paul frequently uses the metaphor of the relationship between slaves and their masters. He speaks figuratively of people who live sinfully as if they were slaves to sin and the death it causes (6:6, 16–17, 20). He also speaks figuratively of Christians as if God has freed them from being enslaved to sin and has himself or righteousness their master (6:18, 22). Because Christians are no longer controlled by their desire to sin, they should instead serve God and live in a way that glorifies him (6:12–14, 19). (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/servant]]) Important figures of speech in this chapter Rhetorical Questions In verses 1–3, 15–16, and 21 Paul uses rhetorical questions in order to answer objections that people might make about what he is saying. Possible translation difficulties in this chapter Inclusive language In this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people those who have been “baptized into Christ Jesus” in verse 3. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
966	6:1	fxgw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 5:20. See how you translated What then in 3:1 and 4:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
967	6:1	pvg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ?	1	In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using a question to address rumors some people may have been saying that misrepresented his teachings. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that we should continue in the sin so that the grace might increase!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
968	6:1	t8tl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ?	1	In this verse and the first part of the next verse, Paul is speaking as if he were a Christian who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous chapter. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
969	6:1	fj9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν	1	When Paul says we in this verse, he is including all “who were baptized into Christ Jesus,” as mentioned in 6:3, so we is inclusive of all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
970	6:1	ngpt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ & ἡ χάρις	1	See how you translated the abstract nouns sin and grace in 5:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
971	6:1	sa16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ	1	Paul speaks figuratively of sin as if it were a location. He is referring to the idea of people continuing to live sinfully after they have become Christians. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Should we continue to live sinfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
972	6:1	ju6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ	1	Paul speaks figuratively of grace as if it were an object that could increase in amount, as he also does in 5:20. He is referring to the idea of Christians experiencing the power or influence of grace in their lives. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “so that we can experience more grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
973	6:1	f5qt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ	1	The phrase so that here introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the supposed purpose for which someone would sin. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order to increase the grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
974	6:2	e82n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο	1	In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
975	6:2	pa6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
976	6:2	wvhg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οἵτινες ἀπεθάνομεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, πῶς ἔτι ζήσομεν ἐν αὐτῇ?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We who died to sin surely cannot still live in it!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
977	6:2	rgte		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἵτινες ἀπεθάνομεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, πῶς ἔτι ζήσομεν ἐν αὐτῇ?	1	Paul speaks figuratively of sin as if it were a location where Christians could live or die. Here, died to sin refers to the idea that Christians are no longer controlled by their sinful desires. By contrast, live in sin means to continue being controlled by sinful desires. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “We who are no longer controlled by our desire to sin, how could we still live as though we are controlled by that desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
978	6:3	wwaw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε, ὅτι ὅσοι ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know that as many as were baptized into Christ Jesus were baptized into his death!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
979	6:3	wh26		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὅσοι	1	Paul is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as many people as” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
980	6:3	yy94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅσοι ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as many people as someone baptized into Christ Jesus someone also baptized into his death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
981	6:3	bd11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν	1	Paul speaks figuratively of Christ Jesus and his death as if they were locations into which someone could be baptized. Here, into Christ Jesus refers to being united with Christ Jesus, and into his death refers to sharing in the spiritual benefits of his death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning of these two phrases plainly. Alternative translation: “were baptized are united with Christ Jesus and also share in the benefits of his death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
982	6:3	tcve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸν θάνατον	1	See how you translated death in 5:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
983	6:4	m43r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	συνετάφημεν οὖν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Therefore, we were buried” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
984	6:4	f4va		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνετάφημεν οὖν αὐτῷ	1	Paul speaks figuratively of Christians as if they were buried with Jesus when they were baptized. Paul mentions burial because it emphasizes that Jesus did indeed die. Here he means that Christians are indeed united with Christ’s death and share in its spiritual benefits. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Then, we are indeed united with Christ’s death” or “Then, we are so united with Christ’s death that it is as if we were really buried with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
985	6:4	vva7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ βαπτίσματος εἰς τὸν θάνατον	1	Here, through indicates that the following phrase is the means by which Christians were buried with Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the baptism into his death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
986	6:4	kmn3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸν θάνατον	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
987	6:4	y71v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸν θάνατον & τῆς δόξης & ζωῆς	1	See how you translated the abstract nouns death in 6:3, glory in 5:2, and life in 5:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
988	6:4	k1el		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν	1	Here, so that indicates that what follows is a purpose clause. Paul is stating one purpose for which God instituted baptism. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases to make this explicit. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order for us to walk in newness of life, just as Christ was raised from the dead by the glory of the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
989	6:4	kado		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ & οὕτως καὶ	1	See how you translated just as and so also in the 5:19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
990	6:4	z6zk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν	1	The point of this comparison is that the new way a Christian should live after being baptized is similar to being raised from the dead, like Christ was. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we should live in a new way, similar to when Christ was raised from death through the glory of the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
991	6:4	dpy2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the glory of the Father raised Christ from dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
992	6:4	t47r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	See how you translated this phrase in 4:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
993	6:4	ce9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	See how you translated this phrase in 4:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
994	6:4	gblc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe glory that comes from or characterizes the Father. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “through the glory from the Father” or “through the Father’s glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
995	6:4	y29w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς δόξης	1	Here, the glory refers specifically to God’s glorious power. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the glorious power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
996	6:4	r3hn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρός	1	Father is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
997	6:4	gtns		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡμεῖς & περιπατήσωμεν	1	Here Paul uses walk figuratively to refer to how a person lives and behaves. If this would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “we … might act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
998	6:4	hyab		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe life that is characterized by newness. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “with a new life” or “like those made newly alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
999	6:5	msbq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1000	6:5	jdzp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1001	6:5	p6xk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σύμφυτοι γεγόναμεν τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of death as if it were something which Christians could be physically planted together with. He means that by being baptized Christians show that they participate in the spiritual benefits obtained by Christ’s death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we participate in Christ’s death through baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1002	6:5	z8wa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ & τῆς ἀναστάσεως	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of likeness and resurrection, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in what is like his death … his resurrecting from the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1003	6:5	hg5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul implies that likeness of his death refers to the “baptism” referred to in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the likeness of his death that is represented by baptism” or “in baptism that represents dying with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1004	6:5	kfvs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀλλὰ καὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως ἐσόμεθα	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of resurrection as if it were something to which Christians could become part of. He means that Christians will one day rise from the dead like Christ did. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we will also certainly be resurrected like Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1005	6:6	fhvh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God crucified our old man together with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1006	6:6	lu12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη	1	Paul speaks figuratively of our sinful human nature as if it were an old man who was nailed to the same cross as Christ. Paul means that when Christ was crucified he destroyed the power of sin and death that controlled all humans. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “God destroyed the power of sin that controlled people when Christ was crucified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1007	6:6	y0ib		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	συνεσταυρώθη	1	The pronoun him refers to Christ. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was crucified with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1008	6:6	n6o6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, in order that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God crucified our old man. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1009	6:6	jpge		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might nullify the body of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1010	6:6	jw00		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul speaks figuratively of the body of sin as if it were a condition of slavery that could be cancelled. He means that Christ’s crucifixion removed the ability of sinful desires to control people. If your readers would not this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “God might completely end how living sinfully controls people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1011	6:6	l6pd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the body is related to sin. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, the body of sin could refer to: (1) how humans tend to sin. Alternate translation: “our human tendency to sin” or “how living sinfully controls us” (2) how sin controls the human body. Alternate translation: “how sin controls our bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1012	6:6	l3zm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας & ἁμαρτίᾳ	1	See how you translated the abstract noun sin in verse 1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1013	6:6	c5ie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν	1	Here, for could indicate: (1) God’s purpose for nullifying the body of sin. Alternate translation: “in order for it to no longer enslave” (2) the result of the body of sin being nullified. Alternate translation: “causing it to no longer enslave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1014	6:6	rpax		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ	1	Paul speaks figuratively of the body of sin as if it could enslave people. Here he means that the desire to sin that controls people would no longer do so. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “for it to no longer make us live sinfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1015	6:7	f893		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ & ἀποθανὼν	1	Here Paul implies that the one having died is the same “old man” whom Paul said “was crucified” with Christ in the previous verse. Paul means that God considers any person who has “died to sin” (6:2) to be freed from living sinfully. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who has died to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1016	6:7	qvgd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	δεδικαίωται ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul continues the metaphor of sin enslaving people from the previous verse. Here Paul speaks figuratively of sin as if it were something that people need to be freed from. He means that the desire to sin that controls people would no longer do so. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “no longer has to live sinfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1017	6:7	hoqm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δεδικαίωται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has freed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1018	6:7	geua		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας	1	See how you translated this abstract noun in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1019	6:8	mbx9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	In this verse, Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1020	6:8	wwhf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπεθάνομεν σὺν Χριστῷ	1	Paul speaks figuratively of Christians as if they physically died with Christ. He means that through baptism Christians show that they participate in the spiritual benefits obtained by Christ’s death and will one day live together with him. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we are united to Christ’s death when baptized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1021	6:8	c724		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πιστεύομεν	1	Paul implies that since Christians have died with Christ, the result is that they have confidence that they will live together with him. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we are confident” or “this persuades us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1022	6:8	nuc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ συνζήσομεν αὐτῷ	1	Here Paul implies that live together with him refers to “eternal life”, as he mentioned in 5:21 and 6:4–5. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we will also live forever with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1023	6:9	bebx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εἰδότες ὅτι Χριστὸς ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν, οὐκέτι ἀποθνῄσκει	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “knowing that Christ no longer dies, having been raised from dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1024	6:9	zdkc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	εἰδότες ὅτι	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in verse 6. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1025	6:9	gjqq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Χριστὸς ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised Christ from dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1026	6:9	zkq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	See how you translated the similar clause in verse 4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1027	6:9	lvv8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οὐκέτι ἀποθνῄσκει; θάνατος αὐτοῦ οὐκέτι κυριεύει	1	These two phrases mean similar things. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that Christ can never die again. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “he will absolutely never die again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1028	6:9	wem1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	θάνατος αὐτοῦ οὐκέτι κυριεύει	1	Here, death is spoken of figuratively as if it were a lord who could rule over someone. Paul means that Jesus could not possibly die again. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he no longer submits to being dead” or “he can never die again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1029	6:9	kl3e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θάνατος	1	See how you translated the abstract noun death in verse 4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1030	6:10	ehi9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For indicates that what follows is the reason why Christ “no longer dies,” as stated in the previous verse. Use the most natural way in your language to express a reason, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1031	6:10	e290		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃ	1	Here, that which refers to Christ’s death and life. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the death which” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1032	6:10	aw31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ ἀπέθανεν	1	Here, to sin implies that Christ died for the sake of freeing humanity from being “enslaved to sin.” It does not mean that Jesus himself was ever controlled by sin before he died. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “he died for the sake of removing sin’s control over people” or “he died to stop sin from controlling people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1033	6:10	j7bl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃ	2	Here, that which refers to Christ’s life after God raised him from the dead. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the life which” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1034	6:10	z4yb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζῇ τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here, to God implies that Christ now lives for the sake of glorifying God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “he lives for the sake of glorifying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1035	6:11	zjjv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὑμεῖς	1	Throughout verses 11–23, the pronouns you and “your” are plural and refer to the believers in Rome to whom Paul wrote this letter. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers at Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1036	6:11	dw6l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἶναι νεκροὺς μὲν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ	1	See how you translated “died to sin” in verse 2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1037	6:11	bjxg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζῶντας & τῷ Θεῷ	1	See how you translated the similar phrase “he lives to God” in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1038	6:11	nkvd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1039	6:12	pp2t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Therefore here introduces a result clause. Paul is stating how he wants his readers to fact in response to what he said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “This is why” or “Because of this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1040	6:12	s6h1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	μὴ & βασιλευέτω ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι	1	Here, sin is spoken of figuratively as if it were a king who rules over a place called mortal body. Paul means that Christians should not allow sin to control the way they use their bodies. See how you translated a similar use of rule in 5:21. Alternate translation: “do not let your physical body become controlled by sinning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1041	6:12	z1ia		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι,	1	Although body here is a singular noun, Paul is referring to the bodies of his readers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a plural form. Alternate translation: “in your mortal bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1042	6:12	cm8d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι	1	Here, body could refer to: (1) the whole person. Alternative translation: “in you” or “in your whole being” (2) the physical human body. Alternative translation: “in your physical body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1043	6:12	r462		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὸ ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ	1	Here in order to indicates that what follows is the result of letting sin rule. Use a natural way in your language to express result. Alternate translation: “causing you to obey its lusts” or “resulting in you obeying your lusts”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1044	6:12	yg9l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	εἰς τὸ ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks of lusts figuratively as if they were people who could be obeyed. He means that people can submit to their desire to do sinful things. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in order to submit to your lustful desires” or “in order to do what you lust for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1045	6:12	zs9g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of lusts, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how it urges you to lust” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1046	6:12	kh3w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1	The pronoun its refers to mortal body. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “your mortal body’s” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1047	6:13	wt07		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	μηδὲ παριστάνετε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἀλλὰ παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Θεῷ, ὡσεὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας, καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης τῷ Θεῷ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses to emphasize the similar ideas. Alternate translation: “And do not keep presenting your members as tools of unrighteousness to sin, but present your members as tools of righteousness to God. And present yourselves to God, as living from dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1048	6:13	mxto		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μηδὲ παριστάνετε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ & καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης τῷ Θεῷ	1	Paul speaks figuratively of body parts as if they were tools that could be offered to someone or used by someone. He means that he wants his readers to stop using their body parts for sinning, but instead to use them to live in the way God wants. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “And do not keep using your members to act unrighteously by sinning … and use your members to act righteously for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1049	6:13	qncn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὅπλα ἀδικίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe tools that are characterized by unrighteousness. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “as unrighteous tools” or “as tools for living unrighteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1050	6:13	hlzf			ὅπλα & ὅπλα	1	The word translated as tools often refers to “weapons.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as weapons … as weapons”
1051	6:13	wq3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Θεῷ	1	Paul speaks figuratively of his readers as if they could offer themselves as slaves to their master, who is God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “devote yourselves to serving God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1052	6:13	px9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὡσεὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας	1	The point of this comparison is that Christians should live in such a way that demonstrates that they are now dead to sin, but alive to God, as mentioned in verse 11). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as those who are free from living sinfully” or “as those who are no longer controlled by living sinfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
1053	6:13	vk76		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	See how you translated this phrase in verse 4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1054	6:13	amyo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν	1	Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this from the beginning of this sentence. Alternate translation: “and present your members” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1055	6:13	dz8u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe tools that are characterized by righteousness. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “as righteous tools” or “as tools for living righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1056	6:14	xfz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1057	6:14	u36f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἁμαρτία & ὑμῶν οὐ κυριεύσει, οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because you are not under law, but under grace, do not allow sin to rule over you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1058	6:14	gez3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἁμαρτία & ὑμῶν οὐ κυριεύσει	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in verse 12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1059	6:14	bl09		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἁμαρτία & οὐ κυριεύσει	1	Paul is using a future statement to give a command. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “sin must not rule over” or “do not allow sin to rule over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
1060	6:14	caqv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1	Here, for indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul urges his readers to not allow sin to lord over them. Use the most natural form in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1061	6:14	a0dz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν	1	Paul speaks figuratively of law and grace as if they were rulers whose authority people have to live under. He means that Christians are no longer controlled by the requirements of the law, which resulted in people sinning more, as stated in 5:20. By contrast, Christians now serve the gracious God, as is explained in verses 15–23. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “for the law no longer controls you, but you are now controlled by God’s grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1062	6:14	eibi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον	1	See how you translated law in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1063	6:14	ypqx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὸ χάριν	1	Here, grace refers specifically to God’s gracious empowering of people to stop sinning. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “controlled by God’s grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1064	6:15	yk81		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in verses 1–14. See how you translated What then in 3:1, 4:1, and 6:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1065	6:15	zxb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν?	1	Here Paul is not asking for information, but is using a question to address an objection that some people may have to what he said in the previous verses. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we should sin because we are not under law, but under grace!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1066	6:15	rtts		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν?	1	In these two sentences, Paul is speaking as if he were a Christian who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous verses. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1067	6:15	t4cc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὑπὸ νόμον & ὑπὸ χάριν	1	See how you translated these phrases in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1068	6:15	t52x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο	1	In this sentence Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote earlier in the verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1069	6:15	c77g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:4 and 6:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1070	6:16	n5j4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι ᾧ παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους εἰς ὑπακοήν, δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε— ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know that to what you keep presenting yourselves as slaves for obedience, you become slaves to what you obey—whether of sin leading to death, or of obedience leading to righteousness!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1071	6:16	hn6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ᾧ & ᾧ	1	The pronoun translated what here indicates a general reference to a thing or person. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to whomever or whatever … to whomever or whatever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1072	6:16	g6zz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους & δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε	1	Paul speaks figuratively of people as if they could offer themselves as slaves to someone or something. He is referring to being controlled by someone or something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you keep being controlled by … you become controlled by what you obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1073	6:16	psrr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς ὑπακοήν	1	Here, for indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which these people are presenting themselves as slaves. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order to obey” or “for the purpose of obeying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1074	6:16	zim4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ὑπακοήν & ὑπακοῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of obedience, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “to obey … to obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1075	6:16	h0ar		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	Here, sin and obedience are spoken of as if they were masters that slaves would obey. Paul means that people can be controlled either by their desire to sin or a desire to obey God. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “whether you are controlled by sinning, leading to death, or you are controlled by obeying God, leading to righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1076	6:16	gtzd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἁμαρτίας & ὑπακοῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe slaves that belong to sin or obedience. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “slaves that belong to sin … slaves that belong to obedience” or “sin’s slaves … obedience’s slaves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1077	6:16	cyct		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας & δικαιοσύνην	1	See how you translated the abstract nouns sin in verse 15 and righteousness in verse 13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1078	6:16	zfgc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς θάνατον & εἰς δικαιοσύνην	1	Here, leading to indicates result. Use a natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “resulting in death … resulting to righteousness” or “causing death … causing righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1079	6:16	d8gv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς θάνατον	1	Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “leading to spiritual death” or “causing one to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1080	6:17	xj75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	χάρις & τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here thanks be to God is an exclamatory phrase that communicates Paul’s thankfulness. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating thanks. Alternate translation: “I give thanks to God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1081	6:17	tl5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὅτι ἦτε δοῦλοι τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	Here that indicates that the clause that follows provides a contrast between who Paul’s readers were before they became Christians and who they were after they had listened from the heart to true Christian teaching. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “even though you were slaves of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1082	6:17	yxt7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	δοῦλοι τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	See how you translated the similar phrase of sin in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1083	6:17	uwcy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὑπηκούσατε δὲ ἐκ καρδίας, εἰς & τύπον διδαχῆς	1	Here Paul speaks of the pattern of teaching figuratively as if it were a person who could be listened to. He means that his readers accepted the true Christian teaching that Christians were teaching them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “but you accepted the form of teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1084	6:17	ep7k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπηκούσατε	1	The word translated listened implies that the people who listened also responded by obeying what they heard. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you obeyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1085	6:17	my2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑπηκούσατε & ἐκ καρδίας	1	Here, from the heart is an idiom that refers to being sincere or doing something with one’s will and emotions. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you totally listened” or “you listened from deep within” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1086	6:17	lugj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of the pattern of teaching as if it were a slave-master to which people are given over to as slaves when they become Christians. Paul means that Christians should submit to the authority of true Christian teaching. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the pattern of teaching that you were submitted to” or “to the pattern of teaching that you were handed over to, as if you are its slave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1087	6:17	pz14		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃν παρεδόθητε	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God gave you over to” or (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1088	6:18	fcd1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐλευθερωθέντες δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐδουλώθητε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	Here Paul speaks of sin and righteousness figuratively as if they were slave-masters that people could be enslaved to. Paul means that his readers are no longer controlled by their sinful desires, but are controlled by the desire to live righteously. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And having been freed from having to live sinfully, you now have to live righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1089	6:18	y2zg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλευθερωθέντες δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐδουλώθητε	1	If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “And God having freed you from sin, he enslaved you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1090	6:18	twpq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτίας & δικαιοσύνῃ	1	See how you translated the abstract nouns sin and righteousness in verse 16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1091	6:19	jlmd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀνθρώπινον λέγω, διὰ τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of the weakness of your flesh, I speak as a man” or “Because you are still immature, I have to speak in simple terms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1092	6:19	puvh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνθρώπινον λέγω	1	Here, the phrase as a man is an idiom meaning “the way people do” or “like a human being.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I am speaking based on how human beings perceive things” or “I am talking like a mere human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1093	6:19	gt1n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν & τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν & τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ εἰς ἁγιασμόν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of weakness, uncleanness, lawlessness, righteousness, and sanctification, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how weak your flesh is … to act impurely and to be more and more lawless … for living righteously, which leads to being sanctified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1094	6:19	l4ah		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν	1	Here, the term flesh is an idiom that refers to human nature. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “your human weakness” or “your natural limitations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1095	6:19	psmw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in verses 17–18. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1096	6:19	x2kt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὥσπερ & οὕτως	1	See how you translated just as and so in the 5:19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1097	6:19	jbcz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	παρεστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν & παραστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, δοῦλα τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	Paul speaks figuratively of body parts as if they were slaves that could be offered to someone or used by someone. He means that his readers used to use use their body parts to act impurely and to disobey God’s laws, but now they should use them to live in the way God wants. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated similar phrases in verse 13. Alternative translation: “you used your members to act uncleanly and to disobey God more and more … use your members to act righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1098	6:19	o0ta		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ἁγιασμόν	1	The phrase leading to indicates result. Use a natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “resulting in sanctification” or “causing sanctification” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1099	6:20	s9pk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “This reason for this is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1100	6:20	i1ze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὅτε & δοῦλοι ἦτε τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	Here, sin and righteousness are spoken of figuratively as though they were slave-masters. Paul means that when his readers had previously used their bodies to act sinfully, they were not serving God’s purposes as slaves of righteousness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when you were controlled by sin, you did not serve God” or “when you were living sinfully, you did not live righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1101	6:20	mu0y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ	1	Paul is not making a serious suggestion here that sinful people are not required to live righteously. Paul actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of free. If this would be misunderstood in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you were unrighteous” or “you were unable to live righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1102	6:21	x3bn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τίνα & καρπὸν εἴχετε τότε, ἐφ’ οἷς νῦν ἐπαισχύνεσθε? τὸ γὰρ τέλος ἐκείνων θάνατος	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “since the outcome of those things is death, what fruit were you then having because of which things you are now ashamed?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1103	6:21	kjl5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίνα οὖν καρπὸν εἴχετε τότε, ἐφ’ οἷς νῦν ἐπαισχύνεσθε	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the futility of being “slaves to sin” in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation in order to communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So you were not then having any fruit because of which things you are now ashamed!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1104	6:21	vgam		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καρπὸν	1	Here, fruit is an idiom meaning “benefit” or “advantage.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “advantage” or “profit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1105	6:21	pnbm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐφ’ οἷς & ἐκείνων	1	Here, which things and those things refer to sins. If it might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of which sins … of those sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1106	6:21	j2ie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ γὰρ τέλος ἐκείνων θάνατος	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of outcome and death, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “For those things finally result in you dying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1107	6:21	tj21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θάνατος	1	Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in verse 16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1108	6:22	x8vw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	νυνὶ δέ	1	But now introduces a contrast with the previous two verses, a contrast that focuses on time. The word translated now refers to the time after the Roman believers became Christians. If this contrast would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify what now refers to. Alternate translation: “But now that you believe in Jesus,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1109	6:22	cqlf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ	1	This clause indicates the reason why Paul’s readers have fruit leading to sanctification. Use the most natural way in your language to indicate a reason clause. Alternate translation: “because you have been freed from sin and have been enslaved to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1110	6:22	fmtc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here, sin and God are spoken of figuratively as though they were slave-masters. Paul means that Christians are no longer controlled by their desire to sin, but are supposed to obey God instead. See a similar phrase in verse 18. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having been freed from having to live sinfully and having began to serve God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1111	6:22	z3ap		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ	1	If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God having freed you from sin and having enslaved you to himself” or “God having released you from being controlled by your sin and having caused you to serve him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1112	6:22	npf3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἔχετε τὸν καρπὸν ὑμῶν	1	See how you translated fruit in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1113	6:22	a478		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἁγιασμόν, τὸ & τέλος ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	See how you translated the abstract nouns sanctification in verse 19, outcome in verse 21, and eternal life in 5:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1114	6:22	lvhh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ἁγιασμόν	1	See how you translated this phrase in verse 19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1115	6:23	gacy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that this verse gives the reason for what Paul said in the previous two verses. Use a natural way in your language to make this emphasis explicit. Alternate translation: “This is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1116	6:23	ze3f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τὰ & ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος	1	Here, sin is spoken of figuratively as if it were a person who could pay wages. Paul means that the result of living sinfully is eternal death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when a person lives sinfully it results in eternal death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1117	6:23	juc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὰ & ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος	1	Paul speaks figuratively of death as if it were wages paid to those who sin. He means that the result of living sinfully is eternal death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “whoever lives sinfully receives eternal death as the result” or “whoever lives sinfully earns eternal death as if it were wages for work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1118	6:23	iyv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ & ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the wages that come from sin. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “sin’s wages” or “the wages that come from sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1119	6:23	pizh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θάνατος	1	Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in verses 16 and 21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1120	6:23	slyb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θάνατος; τὸ & χάρισμα & ζωὴ αἰώνιος	1	See how you translated the abstract nouns death in verse 21, gracious gift in 5:15–16, and eternal life in verse 22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1121	6:23	cwkw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ & χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gracious gift that comes from God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s gracious gift” or “the gracious gift from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1122	6:23	jn66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Paul speaks figuratively of eternal life as if it were occupying space inside of Christ Jesus. Paul means that eternal life comes by being united to Christ Jesus, as stated in verse 11. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “for those who are united to Christ Jesus” or “comes through being united to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1123	7:intro	fl1y				0	Romans 7 General Notes Structure and formatting Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39) Baptism represents union with Christ’s death (6:1–14) Christians are now slaves of righteousness (6:15–23) Christians have been freed from the law (7:1–6) The law is not sinful (7:7–12) Christians still struggle with indwelling sin (7:13–25) Special concepts in this chapter “The Law” Throughout most of this chapter Paul uses the singular noun “the law” to refer to the group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. However, in verses 21–25 Paul uses the word “law” in several different ways. Each of these different uses will be addressed in the notes. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]]) Important figures of speech in this chapter Marriage Scripture commonly uses marriage as a metaphor. Here Paul uses it to describe how the church relates to the law of Moses and now to Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Possible translation difficulties in this chapter Inclusive language In this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all Jewish believers in Christ. Paul calls these people “brothers” in verses 1 and 4. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1124	7:1	mk7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε, ἀδελφοί (γινώσκουσιν γὰρ νόμον λαλῶ), ὅτι ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ?	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that the Jew is required to obey the Law of Moses his whole life. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know, brothers (for I am speaking to those who know the law), that the law is lord of the man for as long as he lives!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1125	7:1	r9fl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί & τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & ζῇ	1	Although the term brothers and the man and he are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “fellow Jewish believers … a person … that person lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1126	7:1	s4su			(γινώσκουσιν γὰρ νόμον λαλῶ)	1	Here Paul interrupts himself in order to clarify that he is specifically directing this part of the letter to the Jewish believers in the church at Rome. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses like the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate this.
1127	7:1	j67x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, for indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul expects these brothers to understand what he is saying. Use the most natural way in your language to state a reason. Alternate translation: “I know you should understand this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1128	7:1	ajk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	λαλῶ	1	The pronoun I and throughout this chapter refers to Paul (see 6:19). If this might confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1129	7:1	k3h5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμον & ὁ νόμος	1	For every occurrence of the law in verses 1–20 translate the phrase in the same way you translated it in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1130	7:1	okz5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	Here Paul speaks of the law figuratively as if it were a king. Paul means that, like a king, the law must be obeyed by those who are obligated to do so. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “like a king, the law must be obeyed by every Jewish person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1131	7:2	as1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is an example from God’s law that illustrates how “the law rules over the man for as long as he lives,” as Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “For example,” or “As an illustration,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1132	7:2	j4sn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	ἡ & ὕπανδρος γυνὴ τῷ ζῶντι ἀνδρὶ δέδεται νόμῳ; ἐὰν δὲ ἀποθάνῃ ὁ ἀνήρ, κατήργηται & τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	Paul is speaking of Jewish married women and husbands in general, not of one particular woman or husband. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “married women remain bound by law to their living husbands, but if their husbands die, they have been released … of their husbands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1133	7:2	hpn4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ & ὕπανδρος γυνὴ & δέδεται νόμῳ & κατήργηται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law continually binds the married woman … God releases her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1134	7:2	l6d9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ & ὕπανδρος γυνὴ τῷ ζῶντι ἀνδρὶ δέδεται νόμῳ & κατήργηται ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	Here Paul speaks of the law figuratively as if it were a person who could tie a woman to her husband. Paul means that the law of Moses requires a married woman to stay married to her husband only while he is alive. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God requires in his laws that the married woman remain married to her living husband … she is no longer required to remain married to the husband” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1135	7:2	ag23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τοῦ νόμου τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the law that is related to the husband. This phrase refers to the law already described in the previous clause. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the law that requires her to remain bound to the husband” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1136	7:3	w3yw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1	See how you translated this phrase in 5:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1137	7:3	ss60		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ζῶντος τοῦ ἀνδρὸς, μοιχαλὶς χρηματίσει, ἐὰν γένηται ἀνδρὶ ἑτέρῳ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “if she becomes married to another husband, the first husband being alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1138	7:3	jbvc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ζῶντος τοῦ ἀνδρὸς	1	In this clause Paul is describing something that was occurring during the same time period as what he describes in the next clause. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “at the same time that the husband is alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
1139	7:3	ci5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τοῦ ἀνδρὸς & ὁ ἀνήρ	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1140	7:3	r2m4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μοιχαλὶς χρηματίσει	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law will title her an adulteress” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1141	7:3	wg4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐλευθέρα ἐστὶν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου	1	Here Paul speaks of the law figuratively as if it were an object or person someone could to be freed from. Paul means that the law that prohibited a woman from marrying another husband did not apply if her first husband died. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase “she has been released from the law” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “she is no longer required to remain married to the first husband” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1142	7:4	kvqw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	So then here introduces the result of what Paul said in verses 1–3. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “Since this is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1143	7:4	ne64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated this word in verse 1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1144	7:4	z8zj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐθανατώθητε τῷ νόμῳ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you also died to the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1145	7:4	svrq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐθανατώθητε	1	Paul uses the word yourselves to emphasize that even Jewish Christians are not required to obey the Law of Moses. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you very Jews yourselves were also made dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1146	7:4	vpwf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐθανατώθητε τῷ νόμῳ	1	Here Paul uses made dead figuratively to refer to Jewish Christians not being required to obey the Law of Moses. Just as dead people don’t have to obey the law, so too Jewish Christians no longer have to obey it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “your yourselves no longer have to obey the law” or “you yourselves are like dead people in that you do not have to obey the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1147	7:4	v2tu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, through indicates that the body of Christ is the means by which believers were made dead to the law. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the body of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1148	7:4	glzf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διὰ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, the body of Christ refers to the death of Jesus’ body. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through the death of Christ’s body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1149	7:4	xw6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι ὑμᾶς ἑτέρῳ	1	Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God made believers dead to the law. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order for us to become married to another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1150	7:4	g59t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι ὑμᾶς ἑτέρῳ	1	Here Paul uses married to another to refer to Christians being united with Christ as if they became married to him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “so that you might become united to Jesus” or “so that you might be united with Christ like a woman becomes married to another husband”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1151	7:4	rj6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῷ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγερθέντι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to the one whom God raised from dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1152	7:4	t9nt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τῷ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγερθέντι	1	See how you translated a similar phrase in 4:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1153	7:4	gxjj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα καρποφορήσωμεν τῷ Θεῷ	1	Here, in order that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God raised Jesus from dead ones. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order for us to produce fruit for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1154	7:4	c4rl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καρποφορήσωμεν τῷ Θεῷ	1	Paul uses fruit here figuratively to refer to actions that please God as if they were fruit that a person could grow. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we might be able to do things pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1155	7:4	ka0o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καρποφορήσωμεν	1	When Paul says we in this verse, he is including all those whom he called brothers earlier in this verse and in verse 1, so we is inclusive of all Jewish Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1156	7:5	i1zl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in the next two verses explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1157	7:5	gmb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἦμεν ἐν τῇ σαρκί	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of the flesh as if it were a location that someone could be in. He means his readers used to live according to the desires of their sinful natures. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we were living according to our sinful natures” or “we were doing whatever we wanted to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1158	7:5	bl7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ παθήματα τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν τὰ διὰ τοῦ νόμου ἐνηργεῖτο	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of passions, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “wanting to sin that was through the law was working” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1159	7:5	g2rg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὰ διὰ τοῦ νόμου ἐνηργεῖτο	1	Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Paul said something similar about the law causing sin to increase in 5:20. Alternate translation: “that were increased through the law were working” or “that were stimulated by the law were working” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1160	7:5	vlev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ νόμου	1	Here, through indicates the means by which the sinful passions increased. Paul means that the law stimulated people’s desire to sin even more. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1161	7:5	tvku		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐνηργεῖτο ἐν τοῖς μέλεσιν ἡμῶν	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of the sinful passions are if they were people who could work within someone’s body parts. He means that people’s sinful desires caused them to sin with their bodies. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were causing us to use our members to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1162	7:5	denv			τοῖς μέλεσιν	1	See how you translated members in 6:13.
1163	7:5	pnw6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τὸ καρποφορῆσαι	1	Here, to introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “which resulted in producing fruit” “so that they would produce fruit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1164	7:5	xed9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸ καρποφορῆσαι	1	Here Paul uses fruitfiguratively to refer to the result or outcome of someone’s actions. Here Paul uses fruit differently than how he used it in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: or “so that the outcome was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1165	7:5	m071		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῷ θανάτῳ	1	See how you translated the abstract noun death in 6:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1166	7:5	ub7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ θανάτῳ	1	Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1167	7:6	mze7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	νυνὶ δὲ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 6:22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1168	7:6	l8w4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηργήθημεν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου & ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has released us from the law … to that which was holding us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1169	7:6	j6i3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	κατηργήθημεν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου & ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1	Here Paul speaks of the law figuratively as if it were a slave-master from which someone must be released and who can hold people captive. Paul means that Christians do not have to obey the laws God gave the Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “we no longer have to obey the law … to that which we used to be required to obey” or “we are like slaves who have been released from the law … to that which we used to have to obey like slaves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1170	7:6	l2l3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1	The phrase that by which we were being held refers to the law. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the law by which we were being held” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1171	7:6	vcok		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀποθανόντες ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1	Paul speaks figuratively of the law as if it were a location where Christians could die. Here, died to the law refers to the idea that Christians no longer have to obey the requirements of the laws God gave the Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “no longer being required to obey that by which we were being held” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1172	7:6	zafg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς	1	Here, so that indicates that what follows is the result of Christians having died to the law. Use the natural way in your language to indicate a result clause. Alternate translation: “the result being that we might serve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1173	7:6	f9n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς	1	Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “we might serve God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1174	7:6	c1j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν καινότητι & οὐ παλαιότητι	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of newness and oldness, you could express the same ideas in another way. These words indicate different ways in which peopleserve God. Alternate translation: “in the new way … not in the old way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1175	7:6	vhqd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν καινότητι Πνεύματος	1	Paul uses the possessive form to describe the newness that is produced by the Spirit. Paul means that the Holy Spirit enables Christians to live in a new way that pleases God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in a new way that comes from the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1176	7:6	rm8r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	παλαιότητι γράμματος	1	Paul uses the possessive form to describe the oldness that is determined by the letter. Paul means Christians do not live in the old way that the Law of Moses requires. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the old way that the letter requires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1177	7:6	iozz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	γράμματος	1	Paul uses the letter figuratively to refer to the law which is written down with letters. See how you translated this word in 2:27. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1178	7:7	k1jj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν?	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verses, especially what he said in verse 5. See how you translated this phrase in 6:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1179	7:7	bnyx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ὁ νόμος ἁμαρτία?	1	In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using questions to address an objection that some people may have to what he said in verse 5 because they misunderstood him. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that the law is sin!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1180	7:7	f3hc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ὁ νόμος ἁμαρτία?	1	In these two sentences Paul is speaking as if he were a Jewish Christian who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous verses. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1181	7:7	zl8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἁμαρτία & τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sin, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “something sinful … what things are sinful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1182	7:7	erx6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ γένοιτο	1	In this sentence Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote earlier in the verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1183	7:7	u8gm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:4 and 6:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1184	7:7	y92j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	But here indicates that what follows is in contrast to the idea that the law is sinful. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless,” or “By contrast,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1185	7:7	zzsf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in this sentence is an example from God’s law that illustrates the importance of the law. See how you translated the same use of For in verse 2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1186	7:7	g0np		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τήν & ἐπιθυμίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of covetousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what it means to be covetous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1187	7:7	refv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	ὁ νόμος ἔλεγεν	1	Here Paul uses said to indicate a quotation from the law that is written in the Old Testament (Exodus 20:17). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1188	7:7	qb5v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ νόμος ἔλεγεν	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of the law as if it were a person who could say something. He means that God said what was written down in the law. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God said in the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1189	7:8	mz77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἀφορμὴν & λαβοῦσα ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς, κατειργάσατο ἐν ἐμοὶ πᾶσαν ἐπιθυμίαν	1	Here Paul speaks of sin figuratively as if it were a person who could take an opportunity and produce covetousness within a person. Paul means that his desire to sin by coveting increased when he learned the commandment that prohibits coveting. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin, increasing as a result of the commandment, led me to covet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1190	7:8	fh6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	Here, the commandment refers specifically to the command, “You will not covet,” in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the command that we should not covet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1191	7:8	w6ah		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of commandment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God commanded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1192	7:8	zeb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπιθυμίαν	1	See how you translated covetousness in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1193	7:8	r5i2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	χωρὶς & νόμου, ἁμαρτία νεκρά	1	Here Paul speaks of sin figuratively as if it were someone who could be dead. Paul means that his desire to sin would not have increased if God had not given his laws. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “if there were no law, my desire to sin would not have been stimulated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1194	7:9	cag9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	χωρὶς νόμου	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively about the law as if it did not exist before he knew about it. Paul means that he not aware of God’s law at one time. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while unaware of the law” or “without knowledge of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1195	7:9	sz5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐλθούσης & τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	Paul speaks figuratively of the commandment as if it were a person who could come to Paul. He means that he became aware of the commandment. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when I became aware of the commandment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1196	7:9	i90y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐντολῆς, ἡ ἁμαρτία	1	See how you translated these abstract nouns in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1197	7:9	d4wm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	Here, the commandment could refer to: (1) all the commandments that make up God’s law. Alternate translation: “God’s commandments” (2) the commandment against coveting, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the commandment against coveting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1198	7:9	q9le		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ ἁμαρτία ἀνέζησεν	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of sin as if it were a person who could come to life. This could mean: (1) Paul’s desire to sin was stimulated, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin was stimulated” (2) Paul realized that he was sinning, as mentioned in verse 7. Alternate translation: “I became aware of my sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1199	7:10	ouxm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ & ἀπέθανον	1	Paul uses died here figuratively to refer to being spiritually dead, which is the spiritual condition of all non-Christians. Spiritual death results in eternal punishment in hell after a person’s body dies. Paul means here that he realized that he was spiritually dead when he understood God’s law. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I died spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1200	7:10	mzx2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐντολὴ	1	See how you translated this abstract noun in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1201	7:10	jmso		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζωὴν	1	Here, life refers to “eternal life.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of eternal life” or “for living forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1202	7:10	yu1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἡ ἐντολὴ, ἡ εἰς ζωὴν	1	Here, for indicates the purpose for the commandment. Paul means that God’s laws were intended to give eternal life to people who could obey them. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “the commandment that was intended to cause life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1203	7:10	a0rz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εὑρέθη μοι & αὕτη εἰς θάνατον	1	Here, for indicates that what follows is the result of the commandment. Paul means that God’s laws resulted in eternal death for people. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “it was found to result in death for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1204	7:10	hkce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὑρέθη & αὕτη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I found it to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1205	7:10	jrrw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εὑρέθη & αὕτη	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of the commandment as if it were an object that could be found. Paul means that he realized that God’s law results in spiritual death for people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I realized it was to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1206	7:10	y97i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θάνατον	1	Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1207	7:11	r582		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ & ἁμαρτία ἀφορμὴν λαβοῦσα διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	See how you translated this clause in verse 8. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1208	7:11	qi99		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐξηπάτησέν με	1	Here Paul speaks of sin figuratively as if it were a person who could deceive people. Paul means that his desire to sin tricked him into thinking that he could become righteous by obeying the commandment. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “caused me to deceive myself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1209	7:11	qljg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	δι’ αὐτῆς	1	The pronoun it refers to the commandment. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “through the commandment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1210	7:11	f6sx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἀπέκτεινεν	1	Here Paul speaks of sin figuratively as if it were a person who could kill people. Paul means that his desire to sin caused him to disobey God’s law, which resulted in Paul being spiritually dead. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “caused me to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1211	7:12	h0li		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	So then here introduces the result of what Paul said in verses 7–11. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “Since this is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1212	7:12	i3ka		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐντολὴ	1	See how you translated this abstract noun in verse 9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1213	7:13	us69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Therefore here indicates that what follows is the result of what Paul said in verses 7–12. Use a natural way in your language to introduce the result of something. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “This is why” or “Because of this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1214	7:13	e1bx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τὸ & ἀγαθὸν ἐμοὶ ἐγένετο θάνατος?	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the law did not directly cause him to become spiritually dead. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “surely what is good did not become death to me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1215	7:13	g451		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ & ἀγαθὸν & διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ	1	Here, what is good refers to the law. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God’s good laws … through those good laws” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1216	7:13	qwe9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐμοὶ ἐγένετο θάνατος	1	Here Paul speaks of the law figuratively as if it could become death. Paul is referring to the idea that God’s laws directly caused him to become spiritually dead. He rejects this idea in the next sentence. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “did … cause me to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1217	7:13	ee64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θάνατος & θάνατον	1	In this verse death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1218	7:13	r84l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θάνατος & ἡ ἁμαρτία & ἁμαρτία & θάνατον & ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	See how you translated the abstract nouns sin and commandment in verse 11 and death in verse 10. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1219	7:13	hgm6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μὴ γένοιτο!	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:4 and 6:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1220	7:13	f9md		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἀλλὰ ἡ ἁμαρτία, ἵνα φανῇ ἁμαρτία διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But sin produced death in me in order that it might be shown to be sin through what is good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1221	7:13	qoe9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἁμαρτία, ἵνα φανῇ ἁμαρτία διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον	1	Here, in order that indicates a purpose clause. Paul is stating a purpose for sin producing death. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “sin produced death in me for the purpose of showing itself to be sin through what is good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1222	7:13	kvhi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	φανῇ ἁμαρτία	1	Here Paul uses shown figuratively as if sin were an object that people could see. Paul means that God’s laws enable people to recognize what sin is. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it might be recognized to be sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1223	7:13	e7r4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ	1	Here, through indicates that what is good is the means by which sin is clearly understood to be sin. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of what is good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1224	7:13	m4l5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ ἁμαρτία & μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον;	1	Here Paul speaks of sin figuratively as if it were a person who could kill someone. Paul means that his desire to sin caused him to disobey God’s law, which resulted in Paul being spiritually dead. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sin … caused me to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1225	7:13	pnq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of death as if it were an object that could be inside a person. He means that he was spiritually dead. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “killed me spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1226	7:13	cuct		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα γένηται καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν ἁμαρτωλὸς ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	Here, so that indicates a purpose clause. Paul is stating another purpose for sin producing death. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order for sin to become sinful beyond measure through the commandment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1227	7:13	a6zb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς	1	Here, through indicates that the commandment is the means by which sin becomes sinful beyond measure. Paul means that God’s laws provide a standard by which people can understand how extremely sinful sin is. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the commandment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1228	7:13	clht		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	γένηται καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν ἁμαρτωλὸς ἡ ἁμαρτία	1	Here Paul speaks of sin figuratively as if it were a person who could become more sinful. He means that God’s laws provide a standard by which people can understand how extremely sinful sin is. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sin might be recognized as sinful beyond measure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1229	7:13	oy2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν	1	The phrase beyond measure is an idiom that means “to a great degree” or “exceedingly.” If this might confuse your readers, you could use a similar idiom from your language or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to an extreme degree” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1230	7:14	k5mg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that this verse is the reason why the previous statement is true. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “These things I have just said are true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1231	7:14	quen		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ νόμος πνευματικός ἐστιν	1	Here, spiritual means that the source of the law is God’s Spirit. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the law comes from God’s Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1232	7:14	vxn0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἐγὼ & σάρκινός εἰμι	1	Paul uses the word myself to emphasize how the contrast between himself and the law. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I indeed am fleshly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1233	7:14	big5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σάρκινός	1	Here, fleshly refers to the weakness of sinful human nature, which is the inability to stop sinning without God’s help. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “spiritually frail” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1234	7:14	lx8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πεπραμένος	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having sold myself into slavery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1235	7:14	sr9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πεπραμένος ὑπὸ τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of himself as if he were a slave. Here, sold into slavery could refer to: (1) being influenced by one’s sinful human nature. In this case Paul would be speaking about his situation even after becoming a Christian. Alternate translation: “being under the influence of my sinful nature” (2) being controlled by one’s desire to sin. In this case Paul would be speaking about his situation before he became a Christian. Alternate translation: “being controlled by my desire to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1236	7:14	p9pi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑπὸ τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	See how you translated this idiom in 3:9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1237	7:15	udc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that this verse is the reason why the previous statement is true. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1238	7:15	u3av			ὃ & κατεργάζομαι, οὐ γινώσκω	1	Alternate translation: “I am not sure why I do some of the things that I do”
1239	7:15	gneb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	2	For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains “what I produce” in the previous sentence. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1240	7:15	e8ki		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐ & ὃ θέλω & ὃ μισῶ	2	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “what I do not want to do … what I hate to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1241	7:15	az2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	οὐ & ὃ θέλω, τοῦτο πράσσω & ὃ μισῶ, τοῦτο ποιῶ.	2	The phrases I practice and I do are exaggerations that Paul uses to emphasize that he often does what he does not want to do. It does not mean that Paul always does these things. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what I do not want, this I often practice … what I hate, this I often do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1242	7:16	xho0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & ὃ οὐ θέλω	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since what I do not want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1243	7:16	y26s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὃ οὐ θέλω, τοῦτο ποιῶ	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1244	7:16	q3b5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	σύνφημι τῷ νόμῳ, ὅτι καλός	1	Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I agree with the law and thus confess that it is good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1245	7:17	x667		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	νυνὶ δὲ	1	But now indicates that this verse is the logical conclusion based on what Paul said in the previous two verses. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a conclusion. Alternate translation: “So it is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1246	7:17	k7ag		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	οὐκέτι ἐγὼ κατεργάζομαι	1	Paul uses the word myself to emphasize the contrast between himself and the sin that causes him to do what he does not want to do. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “it is no longer I who produces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1247	7:17	id6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸ	1	The pronoun it here refers to doing the sinful acts that he does not want to do, as mentioned in the previous two verses. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those sinful deeds that I do not want to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1248	7:17	f6n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ ἐνοικοῦσα ἐν ἐμοὶ ἁμαρτία	1	Here Paul speaks of sin figuratively as if it were a person who could live inside of a person. Paul means that his desire to sin causes him to do what he does not want to do. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin deeply influences me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1249	7:18	nqhc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous sentence. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1250	7:18	kf8z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	οἶδα & ὅτι οὐκ οἰκεῖ ἐν ἐμοί, τοῦτ’ ἔστιν ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου, ἀγαθόν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “I know that good does not live in me, (that is, in my flesh)” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1251	7:18	p0ma		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	οὐκ οἰκεῖ ἐν ἐμοί & ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου, ἀγαθόν	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of good as if it were a person who could live inside someone. He means that his sinful nature is not good at all. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there is nothing good about me … about my flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1252	7:18	p1c1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῇ σαρκί μου	1	Here Paul uses flesh figuratively to refer to his sinful nature. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my sinful nature” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1253	7:18	kyx9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθόν & τὸ καλὸν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of good, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “any good thing … what is good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1254	7:18	ye8x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	For here indicates that the following sentence is the reason why the previous statement is true. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1255	7:18	gvev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὸ & θέλειν παράκειταί μοι	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the wanting to do good is present in me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1256	7:18	h934		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ & θέλειν παράκειταί μοι	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of wanting as if it were something that could exist inside a person. Paul means that he truly wants to do something good. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I truly want” or “I deeply desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1257	7:18	uxwb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὸ & κατεργάζεσθαι τὸ καλὸν οὔ	2	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the ability to produce the good is not in me” or “I am not able to produce the good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1258	7:19	xftc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the last sentence of the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1259	7:19	ri3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθόν & κακὸν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of good and evil, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “good deeds … evil deeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1260	7:19	j69g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὃ θέλω & ἀγαθόν & ὃ οὐ θέλω κακὸν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that these clauses would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the good I want to do … the evil I do not want to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1261	7:20	kfvj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & ὃ οὐ θέλω, τοῦτο ποιῶ	1	See how you translated this clause in verse 16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1262	7:20	sk9q			οὐκέτι ἐγὼ κατεργάζομαι αὐτὸ, ἀλλὰ ἡ οἰκοῦσα ἐν ἐμοὶ ἁμαρτία	1	See how you translated these clauses in verse 17.
1263	7:21	rqfu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εὑρίσκω	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of a law as if it were an object that he could find. Paul means that he realized the law that is described in the rest of the verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I realized that there was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1264	7:21	qae3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄρα	1	Here, then introduces a result clause. Verses 21–25 describe the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in verses 14–20. Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1265	7:21	y5vo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν νόμον	1	Here, law refers to a rule or principle. It does not refer to the laws God gave the Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this rule” or “a different kind of law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1266	7:21	xxq9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τῷ θέλοντι ἐμοὶ ποιεῖν τὸ καλὸν, ὅτι ἐμοὶ τὸ κακὸν παράκειται	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “that evil is present in me, in me the one wanting to do good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1267	7:21	mo4r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐμοὶ & ἐμοὶ τὸ κακὸν παράκειται	1	Here Paul speaks of evil as if it were an object that could be inside a person. Paul means that he does evil deeds. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I … I do evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1268	7:21	qn1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τῷ θέλοντι & ποιεῖν τὸ καλὸν	1	Here, the one wanting to do good is giving further information about me, which refers to Paul. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who is the one wanting to do good (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1269	7:21	hqp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ καλὸν & τὸ κακὸν	1	See how you translated these abstract nouns in verse 19. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1270	7:22	mvod		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in this verse is the reason why the previous verse is true. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1271	7:22	x28l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνήδομαι & τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of the law of God as if it were a location in which a person could delight. He means that God’s laws cause him to delight. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I delight because of the law of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1272	7:22	nt65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, the law of God refers to the laws that God gave the Jews, which is usually what Paul means when he says the law. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1273	7:22	m13q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸν ἔσω ἄνθρωπον	1	Here, the inner man refers to a person’s mind. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the inner being” or “the mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1274	7:23	zp7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	βλέπω	1	Here Paul uses see figuratively to refer to noticing or perceiving something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I perceive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1275	7:23	fct8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἕτερον νόμον	1	Here, a different law refers to a rule or principle. It does not refer to the laws God gave the Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this rule” or “a different kind of law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1276	7:23	ijp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου, ἀντιστρατευόμενον	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of a different law as if it were a person who could fight within someone’s body parts. He means that his sinful desires caused him to use his body to do sinful things that he did not want to do. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were causing me to use my members to sin in opposition to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1277	7:23	v8d8			τοῖς μέλεσίν & τοῖς μέλεσίν	2	See how you translated members in 6:13.
1278	7:23	t7yh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ νοός μου	1	Here, the law of my mind could refer to: (1) a principle that Paul thinks, which is the delight for God’s laws that he said in the previous verse is in his “inner man.” Alternate translation: “the principle I have thought” or “the principle in my mind” (2) the laws God gave the Jews, which Paul says that he serves with his mind in verse 25. Alternate translation: “God’s law that is in my mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1279	7:23	i8w4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	αἰχμαλωτίζοντά με	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of a different law as if it were a person who could take someone captive. He means that his sinful desires controlled him against his will. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “controlling me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1280	7:23	u4ny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ νόμῳ τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	Here the law of the sin could refer to: (1) that principle that people have a sinful nature. Alternate translation: “the law that is my sinful nature” (2) the laws God gave the Jews, which Paul previously said in verse 5 stimulate people to sin more. Alternate translation: “God’s laws that stimulate sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1281	7:23	po29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ ὄντι ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of the law of the sin as if it were something that could be inside someone. He means he has a sinful nature that influences what he does with his body parts. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that influences what I do with my members” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1282	7:24	nu6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ταλαίπωρος ἐγὼ ἄνθρωπος!	1	This sentence is an exclamation that communicates despair. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “Oh, how miserable I am!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1283	7:24	hmhj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς με ῥύσεται ἐκ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ θανάτου τούτου?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize his despair. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one will rescue me from the body of this death!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1284	7:24	md8e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τοῦ σώματος τοῦ θανάτου τούτου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the body relates to this death. This phrase could refer to: (1) the body that results in this death. Alternate translation: “the body that causes this death” (2) the body that is characterized by this death. Alternate translation: “this mortal body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1285	7:24	q74f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ θανάτου τούτου	1	Here, this death could refer to: (1) physical death. Alternate translation: “that dies” (2) spiritual death. Alternate translation: “of this spiritual death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1286	7:25	w9ui		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	χάρις τῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	This sentence is an exclamation that communicates joy. It is the answer to the rhetorical question that Paul asked in the previous verse. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating joy. Alternate translation: “Oh, how thankful I am to God through Jesus Christ our Lord!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1287	7:25	omjd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	χάρις τῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Thanks be to God who did this through Jesus Christ our Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1288	7:25	evnn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1	So then indicates that what follows in this verse summarizes the ideas of verses 14–24. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a clearer expression. See how you translated this phrase in 5:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1289	7:25	adx1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς ἐγὼ	1	Paul uses the phrase I myself to emphasize the contrast between himself and the sin that causes him to do what he does not want to do. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “it is indeed I who” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1290	7:25	sxn3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τῷ μὲν νοῒ δουλεύω νόμῳ Θεοῦ; τῇ δὲ σαρκὶ, νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively the law of God and the law of sin as if they were people whom he could serve. He means that he wants to obey the law of God but often obeys his desire to sin. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “obey the law of God with the mind, but with the flesh, I obey the law of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1291	7:25	e163		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	νοῒ	1	See how you translated mind in 1:28. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1292	7:25	dzjl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	νόμῳ Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in verse 22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1293	7:25	cdkb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τῇ δὲ σαρκὶ, νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but with the flesh, I serve the law of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1294	7:25	fm51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῇ & σαρκὶ	1	Here Paul uses flesh figuratively to refer to his sinful nature. See how you translated the similar phrase in verse 18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1295	7:25	he4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in verse 23. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1296	8:intro	ev4r				0	Romans 8 General Notes Structure and formatting Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39) Baptism represents union with Christ’s death (6:1–14) Christians are now slaves of righteousness (6:15–23) Christians have been freed from the law (7:1–6) The law is not sinful (7:7–12) Christians still struggle with indwelling sin (7:13–25) The Holy Spirit dwells in Christians (8:1–27) Christians have confidence in God’s love (8:28–8:39) Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 36. Paul quotes these words from the Old Testament. Special concepts in this chapter Indwelling of the Spirit In verses 9–17 and 26–27 Paul says that Holy Spirit dwells inside Christians to help them stop sinning and to intercede for them. The presence of the Holy Spirit within a person indicates that that person is a genuine Christian. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) Predestination Many scholars believe this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” See the use of the word “predestined” in verses 28–30 and “elect” in verse 33. Some scholars take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject, so translators need to take extra care when translating these verses. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]])## Important figures of speech in this chapter Important figure of speech in this chapter Rhetorical questions In verses 24 and 31–35 Paul uses rhetorical questions in order to emphasize that what he is saying is true. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) Litany In verses 35 and [38–39(../08/38.md) Paul uses a repetitive series of words or phrases in order to emphasize the nothing can ever stop God from loving those who believe in Jesus. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter Flesh Paul uses “flesh” in a variety of ways throughout this letter. In this chapter he frequently uses it to refer to sinful human nature. However, he uses “flesh” to refer to Christ’s physical body in verse 3. Every use of “flesh” will be discussed in the notes. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]]) Inclusive language In this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people “brothers” in verses 12. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1297	8:1	xq2y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐδὲν ἄρα νῦν κατάκριμα	1	Here, therefore now marks the beginning of a new section in the letter. It also introduces a result clause that concludes what Paul discussed in chapters 5–7. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “Since all these things are true, there is no condemnation at all” or “As a result of everything that I have just told you being true, there is no condemnation at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1298	8:1	xw65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κατάκριμα	1	See how you translated this abstract noun in 5:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1299	8:1	ti0g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 3:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1300	8:2	whhz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that this verse gives the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1301	8:2	h1ka		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ὁ & νόμος τοῦ Πνεύματος τῆς ζωῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the law that is characterized by the Spirit of life. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the law that is characterized by the Spirit of life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1302	8:2	vt9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ & νόμος	1	Here, the law refers to a rule or principle. It does not refer to the laws God gave the Jews. See how you translated the similar use of law in 7:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1303	8:2	hq2t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τοῦ Πνεύματος τῆς ζωῆς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the Spirit that produces life. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of the Spirit that produces life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1304	8:2	x8uu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Here, the Spirit refers to the Holy Spirit. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1305	8:2	ep3n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ζωῆς & τῆς ἁμαρτίας & τοῦ θανάτου	1	See how you translated the abstract nouns life in 2:7, sin in 5:20, and death in 5:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1306	8:2	ionb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς ζωῆς	1	Here, life refers to eternal life. See how you translated this use of the word in 5:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1307	8:2	irh6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς ζωῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, ἠλευθέρωσέν σε	1	The phrase in Christ Jesus could refer to: (1) the means by which the Spirit sets a person free. Alternate translation: “of life set you free in Christ Jesus” (2) a characteristic of the life. Alternate translation: “of the life that is in Christ Jesus set you free” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1308	8:2	cgbe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse and in 3:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1309	8:2	th4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἠλευθέρωσέν σε ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου τῆς ἁμαρτίας καὶ τοῦ θανάτου	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of the law of sin and death as if it were an object or person someone could be set free from. Paul means that the law that resulted in sin and death does not apply to those who are united with Christ Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “has caused the law of sin and death to no longer control you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1310	8:2	u82e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ νόμου τῆς ἁμαρτίας καὶ τοῦ θανάτου	1	This could refer to: (1) the principle that people have a sinful nature that results in death, as mentioned in 7:23–25. Alternate translation: “the principle that is my sinful nature that leads to death” (2) the laws God gave the Jews, which Paul previously said in 7:5 stimulate people to sin more. Alternate translation: “God’s laws that stimulate sin and death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1311	8:2	jlq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ θανάτου	1	Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1312	8:3	mbh3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1313	8:3	n9mr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τὸ & ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου, ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει διὰ τῆς σαρκός, ὁ Θεὸς	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “God did what the law was unable to do, in that it was weak through the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1314	8:3	z2ej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	τοῦ νόμου	1	Here, the law refers to the laws that God gave the Jews, which is usually what Paul means when he says the law. See how you translated this expression in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1315	8:3	t8lj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ & ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου & ὁ Θεὸς	1	Paul implies that what the law was unable to do was to make people righteous, which is the main theme of this book. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the law was unable to make people righteous … but God did so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1316	8:3	j98t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τὸ & ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου, ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει διὰ τῆς σαρκός	1	Here Paul speaks of the law figuratively as if it were a person who was unable to do something and was weak. Paul means that the laws God gave the Jews could not make people righteous because people are naturally sinful and unable to obey those laws. If this might confuse you readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the law could not stop people from sinning, because sinful human nature prevented people from obeying it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1317	8:3	g6g4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει	1	This phrase is the reason why the law was unable to do what it was supposed to do. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “since it was weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1318	8:3	uzkh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τῆς σαρκός	1	This phrase states the reason why the law was weak. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “on account of the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1319	8:3	etf2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	διὰ τῆς σαρκός	1	Here Paul uses flesh figuratively to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated the similar use of flesh in 7:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1320	8:3	p4qq			τὸν ἑαυτοῦ Υἱὸν πέμψας, ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας, καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας	1	This clause indicates how God condemned sin. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1321	8:3	tc37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὸν ἑαυτοῦ Υἱὸν πέμψας	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “having sent his own Son to the earth” or “having sent his own Son to mankind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1322	8:3	csl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸν	1	Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1323	8:3	uf94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the likeness that is characterized by sinful flesh. He means that Jesus had the same human flesh that sinful people have, although Jesus never sinned. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning in a clearer way. Alternate translation: “in the same flesh that sinful human beings have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1324	8:3	xi5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of likeness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in flesh like sinful flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1325	8:3	v0h2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας & τῇ σαρκί	1	Here Paul uses flesh figuratively to mean “the whole body,” which is made of flesh. See how you translated this use of flesh in 2:28. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1326	8:3	hfr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	περὶ ἁμαρτίας	1	This could mean: (1) Jesus was sent for the sake of doing away with sin. Alternate translation: “in order to do away with sin” (2) Jesus was an offering to pay for sin. Alternate translation: “as an offering for sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1327	8:3	gid8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	κατέκρινε τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of sin as if it were a guilty person whom a judge could condemn. Paul means that God removed the power that sin has to control people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he canceled the power of sin” or “he destroyed how sin controls people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1328	8:3	es29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ σαρκί	1	Here, the flesh refers specifically to Jesus’ body that died on the cross. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in his Son’s body on the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1329	8:4	zcsi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Here, so that indicates that what follows is the purpose for which God “ condemned sin in the flesh” of Jesus. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1330	8:4	j9ff		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου πληρωθῇ ἐν ἡμῖν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The one doing the action could be: (1) us. Alternate translation: “we might fulfill the righteous deeds of the law” (2) God. Alternate translation: “God might fulfill in us the righteous deeds of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1331	8:4	puta		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου πληρωθῇ ἐν ἡμῖν	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of the righteous deeds of the law as if they were something that could be located inside a person. Paul means that God enables Christians to do those righteous deeds that his law required. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the righteous deeds of the law might be done by us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1332	8:4	w2aa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a the righteous deeds that God commanded in the law. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the righteous deeds that the law requires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1333	8:4	rttr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	τοῦ νόμου	1	Here, the law refers to the laws that God gave the Jews, which is usually what Paul means when he says the law. See how you translated this expression in 2:12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1334	8:4	bsp0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	ἡμῖν, τοῖς μὴ κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦσιν, ἀλλὰ κατὰ Πνεῦμα	1	This clause gives further information about us. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “us, that is, those walking not according to the flesh, but according to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1335	8:4	acc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς μὴ κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦσιν	1	Here Paul uses walking figuratively to refer to how people behave or lives their lives. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those not behaving according to the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1336	8:4	grhf			κατὰ σάρκα & κατὰ Πνεῦμα	1	Alternate translation: “determined by the flesh … determined by the Spirit” or “in conformity with the flesh … in conformity with the Spirit”
1337	8:4	bgg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	Here Paul uses flesh figuratively to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated the similar use of flesh in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1338	8:5	xzmt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that this verse gives the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1339	8:5	s5sb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	σάρκα & τῆς σαρκὸς	1	See how you translated the flesh in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1340	8:5	b9in		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὰ τῆς σαρκὸς φρονοῦσιν	1	The phrase set their minds on is an idiom that refers to thinking carefully about something or being intent on doing something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are intent on doing the things of the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1341	8:5	evgr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ τῆς σαρκὸς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe things that are related to the flesh. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “things pertaining to the flesh” or “fleshly things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1342	8:5	cqwa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οἱ δὲ κατὰ Πνεῦμα	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but those existing according to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1343	8:5	x3o6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “set their minds on the things of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1344	8:5	a2n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe things that are related to the Spirit. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “things pertaining to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1345	8:6	uc6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1346	8:6	vyw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ & φρόνημα & τὸ & φρόνημα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of mindset, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way of thinking … the way of thinking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1347	8:6	my98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ & φρόνημα τῆς σαρκὸς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a mindset that is focused on the flesh. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the mindset that is focused on the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1348	8:6	b0wo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τῆς σαρκὸς	1	See how you translated the flesh in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1349	8:6	czmn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	θάνατος	1	Here, is indicates that what follows is the result of the mindset of the flesh. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “results in death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1350	8:6	mbte		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	θάνατος	1	Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1351	8:6	oviz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ & φρόνημα τοῦ Πνεύματος	2	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a mindset that is focused on the Spirit. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the mindset that is focused on the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1352	8:6	q470		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ζωὴ καὶ εἰρήνη	1	Here, is indicates that what follows is the result of the mindset of the flesh. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “results in life and peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1353	8:6	rqnl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ζωὴ καὶ εἰρήνη	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of life and peace, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “is living and being peaceful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1354	8:6	fjk8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζωὴ	1	Here, life refers to eternal life. See how you translated this use of the word in 5:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1355	8:7	lsdo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διότι	1	Here, because indicates that this verse and the next verse give the reasons why what Paul said in verses 5–6 is true. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1356	8:7	gvcr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ φρόνημα τῆς σαρκὸς	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1357	8:7	fpt4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔχθρα	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hostility, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “is hostile” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1358	8:7	pm7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, for indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1359	8:7	thq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐχ ὑποτάσσεται, οὐδὲ & δύναται	1	Here, it refers to the mindset of the flesh mentioned earlier in the verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this mindset does not subject itself to … this mindset is not able to do so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1360	8:7	z2ih		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	οὐχ ὑποτάσσεται, οὐδὲ γὰρ δύναται	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of the mindset of the flesh as if it were a person who could subject himself to something. Paul means that the person who thinks with this mindset is unable to submit to God’s laws. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who thinks this way does not subject himself to … for he is not able to do so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1361	8:7	srp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τῷ & νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐχ ὑποτάσσεται	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of the law of God as if it were a king or master whom someone could subject himself to. Paul is referring to someone obeying God’s laws. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it does not obey the law of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1362	8:7	brde		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	τῷ & νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 7:22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
1363	8:7	bhje		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	Here, for indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1364	8:8	me7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ & ἐν σαρκὶ ὄντες	1	See how you translated this phrase in 7:5. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1365	8:9	vdhw			δὲ	1	However here indicates a strong contrast between people who have “the mindset of the flesh” referred to in the previous verse and the believers to whom Paul is writing this letter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “On the contrary” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1366	8:9	iybo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐκ ἐστὲ	1	Paul uses the word yourselves to emphasize the contrast between his Christian readers and people who live in the flesh. Use a way that is natural in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “However, you are truly not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1367	8:9	czm9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν σαρκὶ	1	See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1368	8:9	e54u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Πνεύματι	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of the Spirit as if he were a location that someone could be in. He could mean: (1) believers are controlled by the Holy Spirit, which is how in is used earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “controlled by the Spirit” (2) believers are united with the Holy Spirit, which is how Paul used in in verse 1. Alternate translation: “united with the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1369	8:9	p55f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Πνεύματι & Πνεῦμα Θεοῦ & Πνεῦμα Χριστοῦ	1	These phrases all refer to the Holy Spirit. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit … the Holy Spirit of God … the Holy Spirit of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1370	8:9	y3vg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1	Here, this one refers to the person who does not have the Spirit of Christ. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this person without the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1371	8:9	akl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	οὗτος οὐκ ἔστιν αὐτοῦ	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe a person who does not belong to Christ. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “this one does not belong to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1372	8:10	ntqo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1373	8:10	q8be		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of you as if you were a location that Christ could be in. See how you translated in you in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1374	8:10	q2q4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τὸ μὲν σῶμα νεκρὸν διὰ ἁμαρτίαν, τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα ζωὴ διὰ δικαιοσύνην	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “the Spirit is life because of righteousness even though the body is dead because of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1375	8:10	lae8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τὸ & σῶμα νεκρὸν	1	Paul is speaking of the bodies of believers in general, not of one particular body. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “the bodies are dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1376	8:10	e6g9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ μὲν σῶμα νεκρὸν διὰ ἁμαρτίαν	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of the body as if it were already dead. Paul means that the physical body of a Christian will still die because of sin. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the body will certainly die because of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1377	8:10	yb1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα ζωὴ	1	Here, the Spirit is life could mean: (1) the Holy Spirit gives a person eternal life. In this case Spirit refers to the Holy Spirit and life refers to eternal life. Alternate translation: “but the Holy Spirit grants eternal life” (2) a believer’s spirit is alive. In this case Spirit refers to the spirits of individual believers. Alternate translation: “but the spirit is alive” or “but your spirits are alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1378	8:10	ya21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because of your righteous status” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1379	8:11	jlc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1380	8:11	i618		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ Πνεῦμα & αὐτοῦ Πνεῦμα	1	These phrases refer to the Holy Spirit. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit … his Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1381	8:11	b9pu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐκ νεκρῶν & ὁ ἐγείρας ἐκ νεκρῶν Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	These phrases refer to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of God, who raised Jesus from dead ones … God, who raised Christ Jesus from dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1382	8:11	jr6p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐκ νεκρῶν & ἐγείρας ἐκ νεκρῶν Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	See how you translated a similar phrase in 4:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1383	8:11	t27d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζῳοποιήσει καὶ τὰ θνητὰ σώματα ὑμῶν	1	Paul uses make alive to imply that he is referring to the resurrection of Christians after they have died. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “will also resurrect your mortal bodies after you have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1384	8:11	xi76		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ & αὐτοῦ Πνεῦμα	1	Here, through indicates the means by which God will make Christians alive. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of his Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1385	8:11	e6t8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τοῦ ἐνοικοῦντος αὐτοῦ Πνεῦμα ἐν ὑμῖν	1	Here, who lives in you gives further information about the Holy Spirit. It is not making a distinction between a Spirit that lives in you and a Spirit that does not. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “his Spirit, that is, the Spirit who lives in you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1386	8:12	mv1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἄρα οὖν	1	So then here indicates that what follows in verses 12–17 summarizes the ideas of verses 5–11. See how you translated this phrase in 5:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1387	8:12	qw5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated this word in 7:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1388	8:12	e3j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὀφειλέται ἐσμέν	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of Christians as if they are debtors. He means that Christians are obligated to live according to the Spirit and not according to the flesh. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have an obligation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1389	8:12	fb3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐ τῇ σαρκὶ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “we are not debtors to the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1390	8:12	ecoo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῇ σαρκὶ & τοῦ & σάρκα	1	Here Paul uses the flesh figuratively to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated the same use of this phrase in 7:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1391	8:12	dh1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	τοῦ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆν	1	Here, to live introduces an explanation of the flesh. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “that is, to live according to the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1392	8:12	gplu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῦ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆν	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in verse 4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1393	8:13	dczr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1394	8:13	ri75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα ζῆτε	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in verse 4 and in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1395	8:13	b9n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μέλλετε ἀποθνῄσκειν	1	Here, die refers to dying spiritually, which is enduring eternal punishment in hell after experiencing physical death. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are going to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1396	8:13	ld2h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὰς πράξεις τοῦ σώματος θανατοῦτε	1	Here, put to death means “completely stop doing something.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you stop doing the practice of the body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1397	8:13	ze08		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰς πράξεις τοῦ σώματος	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the practices that are done with the body. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “what is done with the body” or “what you do with your body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1398	8:13	o1ly		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰς πράξεις τοῦ σώματος	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of practices, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is practiced with the body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1399	8:13	nwul		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰς πράξεις	1	Here, the practices refers specifically to sinful practices that a person does with his body. If this might confuse you readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sinful practices of the body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1400	8:13	xihu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τοῦ σώματος	1	Paul is speaking of bodies in general, not of one particular body. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of your bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1401	8:13	dr0e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζήσεσθε	1	Here, live refers to living forever with God in heaven after experiencing physical death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will live forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1402	8:14	utms		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that this verse gives the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1403	8:14	ojie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὅσοι & οὗτοι	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as many people as … these people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1404	8:14	u8pv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅσοι & Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ἄγονται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as many as the Spirit of God leads” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1405	8:14	yz28		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Πνεύματι Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated the Spirit of God in verse 9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1406	8:14	gd1i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	υἱοί Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul is using the term sons in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1407	8:14	wrk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	υἱοί Θεοῦ	1	Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if God was their physical father. He means that these people have a father-son relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spiritual children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1408	8:15	wpp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1409	8:15	zi1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάλιν	1	Here, again indicates that Paul’s readers had a spirit of slavery before they became Christians. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for a second time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1410	8:15	r57o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πνεῦμα	1	Here, spirit could refer to: (1) a person’s attitude or emotional state. Alternate translation: “a mental state” (2) a demonic spirit. Alternate translation: “a demonic spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1411	8:15	av67		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	πνεῦμα δουλείας & Πνεῦμα υἱοθεσίας	1	In both of these phrases Paul is using the possessive form to describe something that causes something else to happen. If this is not clear in your language, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “a spirit that causes slavery … the Spirit that causes adoption” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1412	8:15	iwyy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δουλείας & φόβον & υἱοθεσίας	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of slavery, fear, and adoption, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of being a slave … you being afraid … of those who have been adopted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1413	8:15	c43f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς φόβον	1	Here, leading to indicates that fear is the result of receiving a spirit of slavery. Use a natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “resulting in fear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1414	8:15	ew0a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Πνεῦμα	1	Here, the Spirit could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, as indicated by the use of Spirit in the ULT. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (2) a person’s attitude or emotional state, as with the previous use of spirit in this verse. Alternate translation: “a mental state” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1415	8:15	ecq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	Ἀββά, ὁ Πατήρ	1	Here, cry out indicates that what follows is an emotional exclamation. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “Oh, Abba! Father!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1416	8:15	vxs9			Ἀββά, ὁ Πατήρ	1	Here Paul writes out the sounds of this Jewish Aramaic word Abba with Greek letters, which means Father. Since John translates the meaning next in the verse, you should write out this word using the most similar sounds in your language.
1417	8:15	ahnr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατήρ	1	Father is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1418	8:16	mwbw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ Πνεύματι ἡμῶν	1	Here, spirit refers to a person’s attitude or emotional state. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a mental state” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1419	8:16	aimw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τέκνα Θεοῦ	1	Here Paul uses children of God figuratively to refer to people who have a father-child relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. Here, children does not refer to young people, but only to the relationship that people have with their fathers. If you translate children using a literal term, choose a word that can refer to people of any age in relation to their fathers. Alternate translation: “God’s spiritual offspring” or “spiritual children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1420	8:17	agxk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1421	8:17	izpd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἰ & τέκνα, καὶ κληρονόμοι; κληρονόμοι μὲν Θεοῦ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the end of the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if we are children, then we are also heirs: we are both heirs of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1422	8:17	hfwo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τέκνα	1	See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1423	8:17	fj7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κληρονόμοι; κληρονόμοι μὲν Θεοῦ	1	Paul uses heirs figuratively to refer to Christians as if they will inherit property and wealth from a family member. He means that they will receive everything that God has promised to give Christians. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those who will receive what God has promised us: both those who receive those things from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1424	8:17	q751		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνκληρονόμοι & Χριστοῦ	1	Paul uses joint heirs figuratively to refer to Christians as if they will inherit property and wealth from a family member along with Christ. He means that God will give to Christians what he gives to Christ. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we will also receive what God has promised us and Christ together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1425	8:17	q6ka		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	συνπάσχομεν, ἵνα καὶ συνδοξασθῶμεν	1	The pronoun him here refers to Christ. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we suffering together with Christ so that we may also be glorified together with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1426	8:17	ggl6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	Paul uses so that here to state the goal for which Christians suffer together with Christ. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1427	8:17	j6ia		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ συνδοξασθῶμεν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God may also glorify us together with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1428	8:18	i5nu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in verses 18–25 gives further information about what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1429	8:18	f3sv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	λογίζομαι	1	The pronoun I here refers to Paul (see 7:1). If this might confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, consider” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1430	8:18	b3b1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λογίζομαι & ὅτι οὐκ ἄξια τὰ παθήματα τοῦ νῦν καιροῦ, πρὸς	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I cannot compare the sufferings of this present time with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1431	8:18	oj49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ παθήματα τοῦ νῦν καιροῦ & τὴν & δόξαν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of sufferings and glory, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the things that make us suffer in this present time … the glorious situation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1432	8:18	jjb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μέλλουσαν & ἀποκαλυφθῆναι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God will make known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1433	8:19	qoj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that this verse gives additional support for what Paul said in verse 17. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1434	8:19	dn11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἡ & ἀποκαραδοκία τῆς κτίσεως & ἀπεκδέχεται	1	Here the phrase the eager expectation is an idiom Paul uses to emphasize how eagerly the creation is waiting. He does not mean that the eager expectation itself is waiting. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the creation is very eagerly expecting” or “the creation is eagerly expecting with much eagerness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1435	8:19	d911		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ & ἀποκαραδοκία τῆς κτίσεως & ἀπεκδέχεται	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of the creation as if it were a person who eagerly expects something. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “it is as if the creation is eagerly expecting with eager expectation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1436	8:19	ulvv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς κτίσεως & τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of creation and revelation, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of the created things … the sons of God to be revealed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1437	8:19	dm6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for the time when God will reveal his sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1438	8:19	sr2p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in verse 14. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1439	8:20	nh58		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in verses 20–22 is the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1440	8:20	zjl2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ & ματαιότητι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of futility, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to being futile” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1441	8:20	gdfe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ κτίσις	1	See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1442	8:20	l9ab		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ κτίσις ὑπετάγη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God subjugated the creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1443	8:20	yvl3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ κτίσις ὑπετάγη, οὐχ ἑκοῦσα	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of the creation as if it were a person who could be subjected to someone and could have a will. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “it is as if the creation was subjected against its will” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1444	8:20	taz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν ὑποτάξαντα	1	This phrase refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who subjected it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1445	8:20	l7bf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐφ’ ἑλπίδι	1	Here, hope refers to the creation’s hope, which is why the creation is “eagerly expecting the revelation of the sons of God” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “on the basis of giving hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1446	8:20	tof4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἑλπίδι	1	See how you translated hope in 5:4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1447	8:21	m3fi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	αὐτὴ ἡ κτίσις ἐλευθερωθήσεται ἀπὸ τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς, εἰς τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῆς δόξης	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of the creation as if it were a person who was enslaved to someone and needed to be freed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the creation itself will no longer decay, but will experience the glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1448	8:21	l6qc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αὐτὴ ἡ κτίσις ἐλευθερωθήσεται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will free the creation itself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1449	8:21	ovn5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἡ κτίσις	1	See how you translated the creation in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1450	8:21	l3vw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς & τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῆς δόξης	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of slavery, decay, freedom, and glory, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being enslaved to decay … being free to experience what is glorious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1451	8:21	r2n9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe slavery to decay. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “being enslaved to decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1452	8:21	ba5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of decay as if it could enslave someone. He means that the creation was certain to decay. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being destined to decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1453	8:21	tx57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς τὴν ἐλευθερίαν	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of freedom as if it were a location someone could enter into. Paul means that the creation will experience this freedom. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience the freedom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1454	8:21	bv03		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῆς δόξης	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the freedom that relates to the glory. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the freedom that comes from the glory” or “the freedom pertaining to the glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1455	8:21	zsks		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῆς δόξης	1	Here Paul uses the possessive form the glory of the children of God to refer to the glory that God shares with believers. This was the same glory that God shared with humans when he created them, but which they lost when the first humans sinned, as mentioned in 3:23. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the glory that God gives the children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1456	8:21	a5ix		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν τέκνων τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in the verse 16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1457	8:22	pcay		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in this verse gives further support for what Paul said about the miserable condition of the creation in the previous two verses. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1458	8:22	l69k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	πᾶσα ἡ κτίσις συνστενάζει καὶ συνωδίνει	1	Here Paul speaks of the creation figuratively as if it were a woman who groans and labors in pain while giving birth to a baby. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the creation is like a woman groaning and laboring in pain while giving birth” or “all the creation is suffering greatly together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1459	8:23	b5sz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν ἀπαρχὴν τοῦ Πνεύματος ἔχοντες	1	This clause could refer to: (1) Paul and his Christian readers. Alternate translation: “those who have the firstfruit of the Spirit” (2) the reason why Christians groan. Alternate translation: “because we have the firstfruit of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1460	8:23	qyic		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὴν ἀπαρχὴν τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the firstfruit that is the Spirit. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the firstfruit, that is, the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1461	8:23	wutm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν ἀπαρχὴν	1	Here Paul uses firstfruit figuratively to refer to the Holy Spirit as if it were the first crop that was harvested during the harvest season. Paul means that the Holy Spirit is the first part of the blessings that God gives Christians. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the first gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1462	8:23	xun5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ	2	Paul uses the word ourselves here to emphasize that Christians also share in the suffering of the creation. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “our very selves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1463	8:23	ch9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν ἑαυτοῖς στενάζομεν	1	Here Paul uses *groan figuratively to refer to the the emotional anguish that Christians experience while they wait to be with God in heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experience emotional anguish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1464	8:23	tiij		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	υἱοθεσίαν & τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν	1	See how you translated the abstract nouns adoption in verse 15 and redemption in 3:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1465	8:23	k1wy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	υἱοθεσίαν ἀπεκδεχόμενοι	1	Here, our adoption refers to when we will become full members of God’s family, as adopted sons. Alternate translation: “waiting for when we are fully members of God’s family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1466	8:23	qsb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun	τοῦ σώματος ἡμῶν	1	Paul is speaking of the bodies of believers in general, not of one particular body. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of our bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1467	8:24	oocv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is the reason why Christians “groan” and are “eagerly expecting” to be fully adopted and redeemed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “We do this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1468	8:24	sv0h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ & ἐλπίδι & ἐλπὶς & ἐλπίς	1	See how you translated the abstract noun hope in 5:4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1469	8:24	xwvy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ & ἐλπίδι	1	Here, in could indicate: (1) that hope is associated with being saved. Alternate translation: “in association with this hope” (2) the means by which people are saved. In this case, hope would refer to faith. Alternate translation: “by this hope”
1470	8:24	x4gi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐσώθημεν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God saved us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1471	8:24	edze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	βλεπομένη & βλέπει	1	Paul uses seen and sees figuratively here to refer to experiencing something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “being experienced … he experiences” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1472	8:24	pgmc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βλεπομένη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people can see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1473	8:24	rxxy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	For here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is true since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1474	8:24	tks9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὃ γὰρ βλέπει τις, ἐλπίζει?	1	Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the trust of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “For surely no one hopes for what he sees!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1475	8:25	ktqd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃ οὐ βλέπομεν	1	See how you translated the similar use of “seen” and “sees” in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1476	8:25	g2pm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃ οὐ βλέπομεν & ἀπεκδεχόμεθα	1	Here, what we do not see and it refer to the “adoption” and “redemption” mentioned in verse 23. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the adoption and redemption that we do not see … we are eagerly expecting these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1477	8:25	l91v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δι’ ὑπομονῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of endurance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “while enduring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1478	8:26	bkwx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	συναντιλαμβάνεται & ὑπερεντυγχάνει	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “helps us … intercedes for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1479	8:26	h8jy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of weakness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in our weak condition” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1480	8:26	a6e1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is true since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1481	8:26	k5pn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τὸ & τί προσευξώμεθα καθὸ δεῖ, οὐκ οἴδαμεν	2	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “For we do not know the thing for which we should pray as we ought” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1482	8:26	fbjc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸ τὸ Πνεῦμα	1	Paul uses the word himself here to emphasize that Holy Spirit helps Christians. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “the very Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1483	8:26	jmp8			στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις	1	Alternate translation: “with groanings that we cannot express in words”
1484	8:27	tq4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ & ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας	1	Here, the one who searches the hearts refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who searches the hearts,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1485	8:27	v184		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ & ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας	1	The phrase searches the hearts means “examines thoughts and emotions.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who knows all our thoughts and feelings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1486	8:27	tz5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ & ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας	1	See how you translated “heart” in 1:21. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1487	8:27	bioe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ φρόνημα τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the mindset that belongs to the Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the Spirit’s mindset” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1488	8:27	rgcb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ φρόνημα	1	See how you translated this abstract noun in 8:6. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1489	8:27	fgdd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ Θεὸν	1	Here, God implies God’s will. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to God’s will” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1490	8:28	u0ev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαθόν & πρόθεσιν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of good and purpose, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is good … what he purposes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1491	8:28	q3ce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς & κλητοῖς οὖσιν	2	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for those whom God called” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1492	8:29	m3vv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὓς προέγνω	1	Here, foreknew could mean: (1) God had determined to know them ahead of time, which is how this word is used in 1 Peter 1:20. Alternate translation: “whom he chose beforehand” (2) God knew what they would do ahead of time. Alternate translation: “whom he knew beforehand,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1493	8:29	xhn2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συμμόρφους τῆς εἰκόνος τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Here, image refers to how Christians will one day resemble Jesus. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated image in 1:23. Alternate translation: “to be a similar form that is like his Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1494	8:29	yuw2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1495	8:29	ojxg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς	1	Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1496	8:29	r3vf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν	1	The pronoun he refers to God’s Son, Jesus. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1497	8:29	lf49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ & πρωτότοκον	1	Here, firstborn could mean: (1) the most important person among God’s children. Alternate translation: “the person ranked first” (2) the first person to be resurrected. Alternate translation: “the first person to be resurrected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1498	8:29	s552		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοῖς	1	Although the term brothers is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1499	8:29	lxym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοῖς	1	Here, brothers refers to Christians, whom Paul calls “joint heirs with Christ” in verse 17. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1500	8:30	hg3f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκάλεσεν & ἐκάλεσεν	1	Here, called refers to God choosing people to be his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “chose to be his people … he chose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1501	8:30	g29g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	ἐδόξασεν	1	Paul uses the past tense in order to refer to something that will certainly happen in the future. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “will glorify” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
1502	8:31	uqou		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν	1	Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verses. See how you translated this phrase in 6:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1503	8:31	xpu3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν πρὸς ταῦτα? εἰ ὁ Θεὸς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, τίς καθ’ ἡμῶν?<br>	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in these two sentences to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say to these things: if God is for us, surely no one can be against us!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1504	8:31	ovfz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1505	8:31	s21a			ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν	1	Alternate translation: “is on our side”
1506	8:32	fqim		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὅς γε τοῦ ἰδίου Υἱοῦ οὐκ ἐφείσατο, ἀλλὰ ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πάντων παρέδωκεν αὐτόν, πῶς οὐχὶ καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ, τὰ πάντα ἡμῖν χαρίσεται?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He who indeed did not spare his own Son but gave him up on behalf of us all will surely also with him freely give us all things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1507	8:32	mifc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὅς	1	He who here refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1508	8:32	s9l9			οὐκ ἐφείσατο	1	Alternate translation: “did not refrain from giving” or “did not refuse to give up”
1509	8:32	vyjk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Here, but indicates that what follows is a strong contrast from what was said in the previous clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1510	8:32	l73i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ ἰδίου Υἱοῦ	1	Here, Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1511	8:32	b3au		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρέδωκεν αὐτόν	1	Here, gave him up means that God allowed people to kill Jesus. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “gave him up to be killed” or “allowed him to be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1512	8:33	vr1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς ἐγκαλέσει κατὰ ἐκλεκτῶν Θεοῦ?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one can bring an accusation against God’s elect!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1513	8:33	tidd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τίς ἐγκαλέσει	1	Here, accusation implies an accusation that is based on facts. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a true accusation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1514	8:33	ekqn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκλεκτῶν Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of elect, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “those who have been chosen by God” or “those whom God has elected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1515	8:33	qmca		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	Θεὸς ὁ δικαιῶν	1	This sentences states the reason why the idea in the previous sentence is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “No on can accuse them because God is the one who justifies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1516	8:34	vt5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς ὁ κατακρινῶν?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one can condemn!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1517	8:34	j1dj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὁ κατακρινῶν	1	Paul is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “the one who condemns us believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1518	8:34	u627		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ ἀποθανών, μᾶλλον δὲ ἐγερθείς ὅς, καί ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὃς καὶ ἐντυγχάνει ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν	1	This sentences states the reason why the idea in the previous sentence is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “No one can condemn because Christ Jesus is the one who died—but more than that, he was raised who also is at the right hand of God—who also intercedes on our behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1519	8:34	tw3l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγερθείς	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1520	8:34	dea5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐγερθείς	1	See how you translated raised in 4:25. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1521	8:34	uc9o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1522	8:34	vd8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅς, καί ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1523	8:35	h9ba		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς ἡμᾶς χωρίσει ἀπὸ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Χριστοῦ?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one will separate us from the love of Christ!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1524	8:35	btoo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡμᾶς χωρίσει ἀπὸ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks figuratively of love as if it were an object that someone can be separated from. He means that Christ cannot stop loving those who believe in him. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “will cause Christ to stop loving us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1525	8:35	sxyq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/litany	θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς, ἢ γυμνότης, ἢ κίνδυνος, ἢ μάχαιρα?	1	Paul uses a repetitive series of words in this sentence to emphasize that nothing can stop Jesus from loving those who believe in him. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of various types of suffering that Christians may endure because of their faith. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone might have to endure. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
1526	8:35	ldx1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς, ἢ γυμνότης, ἢ κίνδυνος, ἢ μάχαιρα?	1	Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely neither tribulation, nor distress, nor persecution, nor hunger, nor nakedness, nor danger, nor sword!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1527	8:35	m2hl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς, ἢ γυμνότης, ἢ κίνδυνος, ἢ μάχαιρα?	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Will tribulation, or distress, or persecution, or hunger, or nakedness, or danger, or sword separate us from the love of Christ?”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1528	8:35	qe2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of Tribulation, distress, persecution, hunger, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “If people trouble us, or hurt us, or distress us, or persecute us, or cause us to be hungry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1529	8:35	q2dc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία	1	Tribulation and distress mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Extreme tribulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1530	8:35	kcjr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἢ μάχαιρα	1	Here, sword refers to being killed violently. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “or being killed violently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1531	8:36	clec		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	Here Paul uses Just as it is written to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Psalm 44:22). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Just as it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1532	8:36	f2de		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the sons of Korah. Alternate translation: “just as the sons of Korah wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1533	8:36	wegb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὅτι ἕνεκεν σοῦ, θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν; ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς	1	In these clauses Paul quotes Psalm 44:22. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1534	8:36	t67y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὅτι ἕνεκεν σοῦ	1	Here, your is singular and refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “For your sake, God,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1535	8:36	s7wj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	θανατούμεθα & ἐλογίσθημεν	1	Here, we refers to the people who wrote this verse. It does not refer to God, who is the one being spoken to. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1536	8:36	phxq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	θανατούμεθα & ἐλογίσθημεν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “our enemies put us to death … they consider us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1537	8:36	h6v7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν	1	The phrase all day long is an exaggeration that emphasizes how frequently these people were being killed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we are killed regularly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1538	8:36	g3pi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς	1	Here Paul compares to sheep those whom people kill because they are loyal to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “We are considered by those who kill us to only be as valuable as the sheep they kill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
1539	8:36	gmi0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	σφαγῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of slaughter, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be slaughtered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1540	8:37	wytd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	But here indicates that what follows verses 37–39 is the negative answer to the rhetorical questions in verse 35. If you translated the rhetorical question in verse 35 as a question, then here you could use a natural way in your language for introducing a negative answer to that question. If you changed the rhetorical question in verse 35 to a statement, then here you could use a word that indicates strong contrast. Alternate translation: “No,” or “On the contrary,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1541	8:37	aii8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τούτοις	1	Here, these things refers to the list of various types of suffering mentioned in verse 35. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these kinds of suffering” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1542	8:37	iui3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑπερνικῶμεν	1	Here, more than conquerors refers to those who have complete victory over their enemies. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have complete victory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1543	8:37	wcm6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς	1	Here, the one who loved us could refer to: (1) Christ, as in verse 35. Alternate translation: “through Christ, who loved us” (2) God, as in verse 39. Alternate translation: “through God, who loved us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1544	8:38	fch1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1545	8:38	dgky		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πέπεισμαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God convinced me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1546	8:38	nsm2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany	οὔτε θάνατος, οὔτε ζωὴ, οὔτε ἄγγελοι, οὔτε ἀρχαὶ, οὔτε ἐνεστῶτα, οὔτε μέλλοντα, οὔτε δυνάμεις	1	Paul uses a repetitive series of words in this verse and the next verse in order to emphasize that nothing can stop God from loving people who believe in Jesus. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of various things in the universe that might cause Christians to suffer. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone might have to endure. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
1547	8:38	ok7f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θάνατος & ζωὴ & ἀρχαὶ & δυνάμεις	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of death, life, governments, or powers, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being dead … being alive … those who govern … powerful things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1548	8:38	js9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀρχαὶ	1	Here, governments could refer to: (1) demons, which is usually how Paul uses this word (1 Corinthians 15:24, Ephesians 6:12). Alternate translation: “ruling demons” (2) human kings and rulers. Alternate translation: “human rulers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1549	8:38	q7ti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δυνάμεις	1	This could refer to: (1) demons with power, which is how Paul uses this word in 1 Corinthians 15:24 and Ephesians 1:21. Alternate translation: “demonic powers” (2) human beings with power. Alternate translation: “powerful people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1550	8:39	fdxl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany	οὔτε ὕψωμα, οὔτε βάθος, οὔτε τις κτίσις ἑτέρα	1	These two phrases are the end of a repetitive series of words that Paul began in the previous verse in order to emphasize that nothing can stop God from loving those who believe in Jesus. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone might have to endure. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
1551	8:39	ppaz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὕψωμα & βάθος	1	Here, height refers to everything that exists above a person, and depth refers to everything that exists below a person. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that is above us … everything that is below us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1552	8:39	ajct		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τις κτίσις ἑτέρα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “any other thing that God has created” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1553	8:39	sd7j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	δυνήσεται ἡμᾶς χωρίσαι ἀπὸ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated the similar phrase in verse 35. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1554	8:39	fr5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, which marks that Paul is giving further information about the love of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “that is, the love of God in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1555	8:39	tot5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in 6:23. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1556	9:intro	w6f4				0	Romans 9 General Notes Structure and formatting God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36) Paul’s sorrow for Israel’s unbelief (9:1–5) God chooses whom he wants to choose (9:6–13) God shows mercy on whom he wants to show mercy (9:14–18) No one can question God’s choice (9:19–33) In this chapter, Paul changes what he is teaching about. In Chapters 9-11, he focuses on the nation of Israel. Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 25-29 and 33 of this chapter. Paul quotes all of these words from the Old Testament. Special concepts in this chapter Flesh Paul uses the word “flesh” in this chapter only to refer to Israelites, people physically descending from Abraham through Jacob, who God named Israel. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]]) In other chapters, Paul uses the word “brother” to mean fellow Christians. However, in this chapter, he uses “my brothers” to mean his kinsmen the Israelites. Paul refers to those who believe in Jesus as “children of God” and “children of the promise.” Predestination Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches extensively on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to eternally save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) Important figures of speech in this chapter Stone of stumbling Paul explains that while some Gentiles accepted Jesus as their savior by believing in him, most Jews were trying to earn their salvation and so rejected Jesus. Paul, quoting the Old Testament, describes Jesus as a stone that the Jews stumble over when walking. This “stone of stumbling” causes them to “fall.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “It is not everyone in Israel who truly belongs to Israel” Paul uses the word “Israel” in this verse with two different meanings. The first “Israel” means the physical descendants of Abraham through Jacob. The second “Israel” means those who are God’s people through faith. The UST reflects this.
1557	9:1	b89f			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul tells of his personal desire that the people of the nation of Israel will be saved. Then he emphasizes the different ways in which God has prepared them to believe.
1558	9:1	yg93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἀλήθειαν λέγω ἐν Χριστῷ, οὐ ψεύδομαι	1	These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that he is telling the truth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1559	9:1	h9mp			συνμαρτυρούσης μοι τῆς συνειδήσεώς μου ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit controls my conscience and confirms what I say”
1560	9:2	jx3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὅτι λύπη μοί ἐστιν μεγάλη, καὶ ἀδιάλειπτος ὀδύνη τῇ καρδίᾳ μου	1	Here, unceasing pain in my heart is an idiom that Paul uses to share his emotional distress. Alternate translation: “I tell you that I grieve very greatly and deeply” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1561	9:2	jky1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	λύπη & μεγάλη, καὶ ἀδιάλειπτος ὀδύνη	1	These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them together to emphasize how great his emotions are. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1562	9:3	rh5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ηὐχόμην γὰρ ἀνάθεμα εἶναι αὐτὸς, ἐγὼ ἀπὸ τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “I personally would be willing to let God curse me and, keep me apart from Christ forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1563	9:3	eg9b			τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Here, brothers means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
1564	9:4	p1ys			οἵτινές εἰσιν Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	Alternate translation: “who, like me, are Israelites”
1565	9:4	l6vs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὧν ἡ υἱοθεσία	1	Here Paul uses the metaphor of adoption to indicate that the Israelites are like God’s children. Alternate translation: “who have God as their father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1566	9:6	s2ma			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul emphasizes that those who are born in the family of Israel can really only be a true part of Israel through faith.
1567	9:6	equ8			οὐχ οἷον δὲ, ὅτι ἐκπέπτωκεν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “But God has not failed to keep his promises” or “But God has kept his promises”
1568	9:6	wy8z			οὐ γὰρ πάντες οἱ ἐξ Ἰσραήλ οὗτοι, Ἰσραήλ	1	God did not make his promises to all the physical descendants of Israel (or Jacob), but to his spiritual descendants, that is, those who trust in Jesus.
1569	9:7	s3rj			οὐδ’ ὅτι εἰσὶν σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ πάντες τέκνα	1	Alternate translation: “Nor are they all children of God just because they are Abraham’s descendants”
1570	9:8	s5xa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰ τέκνα τῆς σαρκὸς,	1	Here, children of the flesh is a metonym that refers to the physical descendants of Abraham. Alternate translation: “all of Abraham’s descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1571	9:8	y17u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated this phrase in the verse 16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1572	9:8	ta8t			τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἐπαγγελίας	1	The phrase children of the promise refers to people who will inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham.
1573	9:9	up57			ἐπαγγελίας & ὁ λόγος οὗτος	1	Alternate translation: “these are the words God used when he made the promise”
1574	9:9	wqb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔσται τῇ Σάρρᾳ υἱός	1	You can translate this in an active form to express that God will give a son to Sarah. Alternate translation: “I will give Sarah a son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1575	9:10	mb5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν	1	Paul refers to Isaac as our father because Isaac was the ancestor of Paul and of the Jewish believers in Rome. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1576	9:10	icc1			κοίτην, ἔχουσα	1	Alternate translation: “had become pregnant”
1577	9:11	h16y			μήπω γὰρ γεννηθέντων, μηδὲ πραξάντων τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον	1	Alternate translation: “before the children were born and before they had done anything, whether good or bad”
1578	9:11	a1gz			ἵνα ἡ κατ’ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις τοῦ Θεοῦ μένῃ	1	Alternate translation: “so that what God wants to happen according to His choice will happen”
1579	9:11	eez1			μήπω γὰρ γεννηθέντων	1	Alternate translation: “before the children were born”
1580	9:11	iw56			μηδὲ πραξάντων τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον	1	Alternate translation: “not because of anything they had done”
1581	9:12	ze3m			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: It may be necessary in your language to place this verse between verse 10 and verse 11: “our father Isaac, it was said to her, ‘The older will serve the younger.’ Now the children were not yet born and had not yet done anything good or bad, but so that the purpose of God according to choice might stand—not because of actions, but because of him who calls. It is just”
1582	9:12	d6mr			ἐκ τοῦ	1	because of God
1583	9:12	wv7n			ἐρρέθη αὐτῇ, ὅτι ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσσονι	1	Alternate translation: “God said to Rebecca, ‘The older son will serve the younger son’”
1584	9:13	xt7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	τὸν Ἰακὼβ ἠγάπησα, τὸν δὲ Ἠσαῦ ἐμίσησα	1	The word hated is an exaggeration. God loved Jacob much more than he loved Esau. He did not literally hate Esau. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1585	9:14	m8xk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν?	1	Paul is using the question to get the attention of his readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1586	9:14	s1hm			μὴ γένοιτο!	1	“That is not possible!” or “Certainly not!” This expression strongly denies that this could happen. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here.
1587	9:15	kq2c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ Μωϋσεῖ γὰρ λέγει	1	Paul speaks about God’s talking with Moses as if it is being done in the present time. Alternate translation: “For God said to Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1588	9:16	d4f5			οὐ τοῦ θέλοντος, οὐδὲ τοῦ τρέχοντος	1	Alternate translation: “it is not because of what people want or because they try hard”
1589	9:16	ues3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐδὲ τοῦ τρέχοντος	1	Paul speaks of a person who does good things in order to gain God’s favor as if that person were running a race. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1590	9:17	x1cj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	λέγει γὰρ ἡ Γραφὴ	1	Here the scripture is personified as if God were talking to Pharaoh. Alternate translation: “For the scripture records that God said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1591	9:17	xu7s			ἐξήγειρά σε & ἐνδείξωμαι & μου	1	Here the pronouns I and my refer to God as the speaker.
1592	9:17	nfv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	σε	1	Here, you is singular and refers to Pharaoh. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1593	9:17	pz5x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐξήγειρά σε	1	Here, raised is an idiom for causing something to be what it is. Alternate translation: “I made you the powerful man that you are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1594	9:17	gps5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅπως διαγγελῇ τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “so that people might proclaim my name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1595	9:17	jp6i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	Here, name is a metonym that could refer to: (1) God in all of his being. Alternate translation: “who I am” (2) God’s reputation. Alternate translation: “how great I am” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1596	9:17	jn7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ	1	“wherever there are people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1597	9:18	a1uv			ὃν δὲ θέλει, σκληρύνει	1	God makes stubborn whoever he wishes to make stubborn.
1598	9:19	z4j2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ἐρεῖς μοι οὖν	1	Paul is talking to the critics of his teaching as though he were only talking to one person. You may need to use the plural here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1599	9:19	bbe4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἔτι μέμφεται? τῷ γὰρ βουλήματι αὐτοῦ, τίς ἀνθέστηκεν?	1	These rhetorical questions are complaints against God. You can translate them as strong statements. Alternate translation: “He should not find fault with us. No one has ever been able to withstand his will.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1600	9:19	hqr7			μέμφεται & αὐτοῦ	1	The words he and his here refer to God.
1601	9:19	n1ti			τῷ & βουλήματι αὐτοῦ, τίς ἀνθέστηκεν	1	Alternate translation: “who has ever stopped him from doing what he wanted to do”
1602	9:20	arw8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως?	1	Paul uses the potter’s right to make any kind of container he wants from the clay as a metaphor for the creator’s right to do whatever he wants with his creation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1603	9:20	knb3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως?	1	Paul asks questions to emphasize his point. You can translate this as a strong statement. Alternate translation: “What a person has molded should never say to the one who molds it, ‘Why did you make me this way?’!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1604	9:20	wcj3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως	1	This question is a rebuke and can be translated as a strong statement. Alternate translation: “You should not have made me this way!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1605	9:21	e94a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ ἔχει ἐξουσίαν ὁ κεραμεὺς τοῦ πηλοῦ, ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ φυράματος ποιῆσαι ὃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος, ὃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν?	1	This rhetorical question is a rebuke. Alternate translation: “The potter certainly has the right over the clay to make from the same lump a container for special occasions, but another for daily use.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1606	9:22	we86		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκεύη ὀργῆς	1	Paul speaks of people as if they were containers. Alternate translation: “people who deserve wrath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1607	9:23	ufj7			γνωρίσῃ & αὐτοῦ	1	The pronouns he and his here refer to God.
1608	9:23	v33r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκεύη ἐλέους	1	Paul speaks of people as if they were containers. Alternate translation: “people who deserve mercy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1609	9:23	she3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸν πλοῦτον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ	1	Paul compares God’s wonderful actions here to great riches. Alternate translation: “his glory, which is of great value, upon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1610	9:23	t41s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἃ προητοίμασεν εἰς δόξαν	1	Here, glory refers to life in heaven with God. Alternate translation: “whom he prepared ahead of time in order that they might live with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1611	9:24	y6vp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καὶ & ἡμᾶς	1	The pronoun us here refers to Paul and fellow believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1612	9:24	t8rn			ἐκάλεσεν	1	Here, called means God has appointed or chosen people to be his children, to be his servants and proclaimers of his message of salvation through Jesus.
1613	9:25	eqc2			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: In this section Paul explains how Israel’s unbelief as a nation was told ahead of time by the prophet Hosea.
1614	9:25	ewb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ Ὡσηὲ λέγει	1	Here, he refers to God. Alternate translation: “As God says also in the book that Hosea wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1615	9:25	m82v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῷ Ὡσηὲ	1	Hosea was an Old Testament prophet. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1616	9:25	gi5k			καλέσω τὸν οὐ λαόν μου, λαόν μου	1	Alternate translation: “I will choose for my people those who were not my people”
1617	9:25	yy15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὴν οὐκ ἠγαπημένην, ἠγαπημένην	1	Here, the one refers to Hosea’s wife, Gomer, who represents the nation of Israel. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “I will choose her whom I did not love to be one whom I love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1618	9:26	qe9f			υἱοὶ Θεοῦ ζῶντος	1	The word living may refer to the fact that God is the only true God, and not like the false idols. Alternate translation: “children of the true God”
1619	9:27	zqi1			κράζει	1	Alternate translation: “calls out”
1620	9:27	k9j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὡς ἡ ἄμμος τῆς θαλάσσης	1	Here Paul compares the number of the people of Israel to the number of grains of sand in the sea. Alternate translation: “too many to count” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
1621	9:27	wig1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθήσεται	1	Paul uses the word saved in a spiritual sense. If God saves a person, it means that through believing in Jesus’ death on the cross, God has forgiven him and rescued him from being punished for his sin. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will save” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1622	9:28	cm32			λόγον & ποιήσει Κύριος ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1	Here, word refers to how he has decided to punish people. Alternate translation: “the Lord will punish people on the earth according to how he has said”
1623	9:29	dl9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν & ἂν ἐγενήθημεν	1	Here the pronouns us and we refer to Isaiah and those to whom he spoke. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1624	9:29	tk2e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν	1	God killed all of the people of Sodom and Gomorrah because of their sin. Alternate translation: “we all would have been destroyed like the people of Sodom and Gomorrah” or “God would have destroyed all of us, like he destroyed the cities of Sodom and Gommorah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1625	9:30	m5l2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν?	1	Paul uses this question to get the attention of his readers. Alternate translation: “This is what we must say.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1626	9:30	ki4k			ὅτι ἔθνη	1	Alternate translation: “We will say that the Gentiles”
1627	9:30	bnl6			τὰ μὴ διώκοντα δικαιοσύνην	1	Alternate translation: “who were not trying to please God”
1628	9:30	gl4m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δικαιοσύνην & τὴν ἐκ πίστεως	1	Here, by faith refers to placing one’s trust in Christ. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “because God made them right with him when they trusted in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1629	9:31	f18n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς νόμον οὐκ ἔφθασεν	1	This means that the Israelites could not please God by trying to keep the law. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “were not able to please God by keeping the law because they could not keep it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1630	9:32	y4pf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	διὰ τί?	1	This is an ellipsis. You can include the implied words in your translation. Alternate translation: “Why could they not attain righteousness?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1631	9:32	e7p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	διὰ τί?	1	Paul asks this question to get the attention of his readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1632	9:32	j5jp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς ἐξ ἔργων	1	This refers to things that people do to try to please God. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “by trying to do things that would please God” or “by keeping the Law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1633	9:33	kx9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	You can indicate that Isaiah wrote this. Alternate translation: “just as it has been written by Isaiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1634	9:33	ivt3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “as Isaiah the prophet wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1635	9:33	dy6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν Σιὼν	1	Here, Zion is a metonym that represents Israel. Alternate translation: “in Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1636	9:33	u3dj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου	1	Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1637	9:33	mf6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου	1	These phrases are metaphors that refer to Jesus and his death on the cross. It was as if the people stumbled over a stone because they were disgusted when they considered Jesus’ death on the cross. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1638	9:33	tu4i			πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ	1	Because the stone stands for a person, you may need to translate this as “who believes in him.”
1639	10:intro	c2li				0	Romans 10 General Notes Structure and formatting God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36) Paul’s sorrow for Israel’s unbelief (9:1–5) God chooses whom he wants to choose (9:6–13) God shows mercy on whom he wants to show mercy (9:14–18) No one can question God’s choice (9:19–33) Israel’s false righteousness (10:1–4) Salvation is available to everyone (10:5–21) Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 8. Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 18-20 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament. Special concepts in this chapter God’s righteousness Paul teaches here that while many Jews earnestly tried to be righteous, they did not succeed. We cannot earn God’s righteousness. God gives us Jesus’ righteousness when we believe in him. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) Important figures of speech in this chapter Rhetorical questions Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He does this to convince his readers that God does not save only the Hebrew people, so Christians must be ready to go and share the gospel with the whole world. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “I will provoke you to jealousy by what is not a nation” Paul uses this prophecy to explain that God will use the church to make the Hebrew people jealous. This is so they will seek God and believe the gospel. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/jealous]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1640	10:1	pi37			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul continues stating his desire for Israel to believe but emphasizes that both those who are Jews as well as everyone else can only be saved by faith in Jesus.
1641	10:1	hj4b			ἀδελφοί	1	Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.
1642	10:1	tq7k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ μὲν εὐδοκία τῆς ἐμῆς καρδίας	1	Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s emotions or inner being. Alternate translation: “my greatest desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1643	10:1	tmf2			ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν εἰς σωτηρίαν	1	Alternate translation: “is that God will save the Jews”
1644	10:2	y7qg			μαρτυρῶ & αὐτοῖς	1	Alternate translation: “I declare truthfully about them”
1645	10:3	bw97		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀγνοοῦντες γὰρ τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην	1	Here, righteousness refers to the way God puts people right with himself. You can make this explicit in the translation. Alternate translation: “For they do not know how God puts people right with himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1646	10:3	a6r4			τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐχ ὑπετάγησαν	1	Alternate translation: “they did not accept God’s way of putting people right with himself”
1647	10:4	x1w8			τέλος γὰρ νόμου Χριστὸς	1	Alternate translation: “For Christ completely fulfilled the law”
1648	10:4	f6pu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς δικαιοσύνην παντὶ τῷ πιστεύοντι	1	Here, believes means “trusts.” Alternate translation: “in order that he may make everyone who trusts in him right before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1649	10:5	qby2			τὴν δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐκ νόμου	1	Alternate translation: “how the law makes a person right before God”
1650	10:5	wjn6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅτι ὁ ποιήσας αὐτὰ ἄνθρωπος, ζήσεται ἐν αὐτῇ	1	In order to be made right with God through the law, a person would have to keep the law perfectly, which is not possible. Alternate translation: “The person who perfectly obeys the law will live because the law will make him right before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1651	10:5	qkz4			ζήσεται	1	Here, will live could refer to: (1) eternal life. (2) mortal life in fellowship with God.
1652	10:6	sr9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ δὲ ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη οὕτως λέγει	1	Here, righteousness is described as a person who can speak. Alternate translation: “But Moses writes this about how faith makes a person right before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1653	10:6	x7h4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	μὴ εἴπῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου	1	Moses was addressing the people as if he were speaking to only one person. The pronoun your is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1654	10:6	nwlw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	μὴ εἴπῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου	1	Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner being. Alternate translation: “Do not say to yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1655	10:6	tf9r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς ἀναβήσεται εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν?	1	Moses uses a question to teach his audience. His previous instruction of, “Do not say” requires a negative answer to this question. You can translate this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one is able to go up to heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1656	10:6	gi7s			τοῦτ’ ἔστιν Χριστὸν καταγαγεῖν	1	Alternate translation: “in order that they might have Christ come down to earth”
1657	10:7	w8xe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς καταβήσεται εἰς τὴν Ἄβυσσον?	1	Moses uses a question to teach his audience. His previous instruction of, “Do not say” requires a negative answer to this question. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “No person can go down and enter the place where the spirits of dead persons are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1658	10:7	iw13			ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld.
1659	10:7	t8dd			νεκρῶν	1	Here, the dead speaks of physical death.
1660	10:8	gz7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἀλλὰ τί λέγει?	1	The word it refers to “the righteousness” of Romans 10:6. Here Paul describes righteousness as a person who can speak. Alternate translation: “But this is what Moses says?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1661	10:8	sen1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἀλλὰ τί λέγει?	1	Paul uses a question to emphasize the answer he is about to give. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1662	10:8	kzb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν	1	Paul speaks of God’s word as if it were a person who can move. Alternate translation: “You have heard the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1663	10:8	y6mq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν, ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, καὶ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου	1	The word mouth is a metonym that refers to what a person says. Alternate translation: “You can hear and know how to speak and think about God’s message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1664	10:8	zvx4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου	1	The phrase in your heart is metonym that refers to what a person thinks and believes. Alternate translation: “and you know what it means” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1665	10:8	lh5d			τὸ ῥῆμα τῆς πίστεως	1	Alternate translation: “God’s message that tells us that we must believe in him”
1666	10:9	tz7r			ἐὰν ὁμολογήσῃς ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, Κύριον Ἰησοῦν	1	Alternate translation: “if you verbally confess that Jesus is Lord”
1667	10:9	ie71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πιστεύσῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου	1	Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner person. Alternate translation: “believe in your mind” or “truly believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1668	10:9	zdf5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	αὐτὸν ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Here, raised here is an idiom for “caused to live again.” Alternate translation: “caused him to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1669	10:9	c3cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθήσῃ	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1670	10:10	g7i1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καρδίᾳ γὰρ πιστεύεται εἰς δικαιοσύνην, στόματι δὲ ὁμολογεῖται εἰς σωτηρίαν	1	Here, heart is a metonym that represents the mind or will. Alternate translation: “For it is with the mind that a person trusts and is right before God, and it is with the mouth that a person confesses and God saves him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1671	10:10	xs8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	στόματι	1	Here, mouth is a synecdoche that represents a person’s capacity to speak. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1672	10:11	gu99		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	λέγει γὰρ ἡ Γραφή	1	Paul speaks of the scripture as if it were alive and had a voice. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1673	10:11	r6tf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λέγει γὰρ ἡ Γραφή	1	You can make explicit who wrote the scripture that Paul uses here. Alternate translation: “For Isaiah wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1674	10:11	nv71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ οὐ καταισχυνθήσεται	1	This is equivalent to: “Everyone who does not believe will be shamed.” The negative is used here for emphasis. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will honor everyone who believes in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1675	10:12	z8p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ γάρ ἐστιν διαστολὴ Ἰουδαίου τε καὶ Ἕλληνος	1	Paul implies that God will treat all people the same. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “In this way, God treats the Jews and the non-Jews the same” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1676	10:12	p9py		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πλουτῶν εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους αὐτόν	1	Here, being rich means that God blesses richly. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “and he richly blesses all who trust in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1677	10:13	pe96		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πᾶς γὰρ ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται	1	Here the word name is a metonym for Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1678	10:13	js1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πᾶς γὰρ ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For the Lord will save everyone who trusts in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1679	10:14	utr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς οὖν ἐπικαλέσωνται εἰς ὃν οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν?	1	Paul uses a question to emphasize the importance of taking the good news of Christ to those who have not heard. The word they refers to those who do not yet belong to God. Alternate translation: “Those who do not believe in God cannot call on him!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1680	10:14	lx52		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς & πιστεύσωσιν οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν?	2	Paul uses another question for the same reason. Alternate translation: “they cannot believe in him if they have not heard his message!” or “they cannot believe in him if they have not heard the message about him!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1681	10:14	mrl8			πιστεύσωσιν	1	Here this means to acknowledge that what that person has said is true.
1682	10:14	iwc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς & ἀκούσωσιν χωρὶς κηρύσσοντος?	3	Paul uses another question for the same reason. Alternate translation: “they cannot hear the message if someone does not tell them!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1683	10:15	e8rt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὡς ὡραῖοι οἱ πόδες τῶν εὐαγγελιζομένων τὰ ἀγαθά!	1	Paul uses feet to represent those who travel and bring the message to those who have not heard it. Alternate translation: “It is wonderful when messengers come and tell us the good news” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1684	10:16	hku8			οὐ πάντες ὑπήκουσαν	1	Here, them refers to the Jews. “not all of the Jews obeyed”
1685	10:16	j3se		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	Κύριε, τίς ἐπίστευσεν τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν?	1	Paul is using this question to emphasize that Isaiah prophesied in the Scriptures that many Jews would not believe in Jesus. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “Lord, so many of them do not believe our message.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1686	10:16	z4s9			τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν	1	Here, our refers to God and Isaiah.
1687	10:17	wu5a			ἡ πίστις ἐξ ἀκοῆς	1	Here, faith refers to “believing in Christ”
1688	10:17	nq87			ἡ & ἀκοὴ διὰ ῥήματος Χριστοῦ	2	Alternate translation: “hearing by listening to the message about Christ”
1689	10:18	f6jy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἀλλὰ λέγω, μὴ οὐκ ἤκουσαν? μενοῦνγε	1	Paul uses a question for emphasis. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “But, I say the Jews certainly have heard the message about Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1690	10:18	s5zh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν	1	Both of these statements mean basically the same thing and Paul uses them for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1691	10:18	g4vd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν	1	The word their refers to the sun, moon, and stars. Here they are described as human messengers that tell people about God. This refers to how their existence shows God’s power and glory. Alternate translation: “The sun, moon, and the stars are proof of God’s power and glory, and everyone in the world sees them and knows the truth about God.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1692	10:18	lz77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν	1	You can make explicit that Paul is quoting Scripture here. Alternate translation: “As the Scriptures record, ‘The sun, moon, and the stars are proof of God’s power and glory, and everyone in the world sees them and knows the truth about God.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1693	10:19	ib4m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἀλλὰ λέγω, μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ἔγνω?	1	Paul uses a question for emphasis. Alternate translation: “Again I tell you that Israel did know the message.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1694	10:19	zyw0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀλλὰ λέγω, μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ἔγνω?	1	The word Israel is a metonym for the people who lived in the nation of Israel. Alternate translation: “Again I tell you the people of Israel did know the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1695	10:19	jjt3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρῶτος Μωϋσῆς λέγει	1	This means that Moses wrote down what God said. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1696	10:19	vxzz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς, & παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς	1	Both instances of I refer to God, and you refers to the Israelites. Alternate translation: “God will provoke you … God will stir you up to anger.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1697	10:19	ve6t			ἐπ’ οὐκ ἔθνει	1	Alternate translation: “by those you do not consider to be a real nation” or “by people who do not belong to any nation”
1698	10:19	s3nz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπ’ ἔθνει ἀσυνέτῳ	1	Here, without understanding means that the people do not know God. Alternate translation: “by a nation with people who do not know me or my commands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1699	10:19	g7zt			παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς	1	Alternate translation: “I will make you angry” or “I will cause you to become angry”
1700	10:19	a7k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὑμᾶς	1	Here, you refers to the nation of Israel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1701	10:20	qcx2			General Information:	0	General Information: Here the words I, “me,” and “my” refer to God.
1702	10:20	cv1x			Ἠσαΐας δὲ ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει	1	This means the prophet Isaiah wrote what God had said.
1703	10:20	fc4b			εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν	1	Prophets often speak of things in the future as if they have already happened. This emphasizes that the prophecy will certainly come true.
1704	10:20	u60f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Even though the Gentile people will not look for me, they will find me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1705	10:20	t78j			ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην	1	Alternate translation: “I made myself known”
1706	10:20	k8pp			λέγει	1	He refers to God, who is speaking through Isaiah.
1707	10:21	hw4w			ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν	1	This phrase is used to emphasize God’s continual effort. “Continually”
1708	10:21	il8s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐξεπέτασα τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα	1	The action of reaching out a hand represents offering help to a person. Alternate translation: “I tried to welcome you and to help you, but you refused my help and continued to disobey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1709	11:intro	e9qz				0	Romans 11 General Notes Structure and formatting God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36) Paul’s sorrow for Israel’s unbelief (9:1–5) God chooses whom he wants to choose (9:6–13) God shows mercy on whom he wants to show mercy (9:14–18) No one can question God’s choice (9:19–33) Israel’s false righteousness (10:1–4) Salvation is available to everyone (10:5–21) Israel has a faithful remnant (11:1–10) Israel’s unbelief resulted in non-Jews’ belief (11:11–24) God will save Israel (11:15–32) Praise for God’s wisdom (11:33–11:36) Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-10, 26-27, and 34-35, which are words from the Old Testament. Special concepts in this chapter Grafting Paul uses the image of “grafting” to refer to the place of the Gentiles and Jews in the plans of God. Making one plant to be permanently part of another plant is called “grafting.” Paul uses the picture of God grafting the Gentiles as a wild branch into his saving plans. But God has not forgotten about the Jews, who are spoken of as the natural plant. God will also save Jews who believe in Jesus. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “Did God reject his people? May it never be” Whether Israel (the physical descendants of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob) has a future in the plans of God, or if they have been replaced in the plans of God by the church, is a major theological issue in Chapters 9-11. This phrase is an important part of this section of Romans. It seems to indicate that Israel remains distinct from the church. Not all scholars arrive at this conclusion. Despite their currently rejecting Jesus as their Messiah, Israel has not exhausted the grace and mercy of God. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/mercy]])
1710	11:1	p2h9			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Though Israel as a nation has rejected God, God wants them to understand salvation comes by grace without works.
1711	11:1	wp35			λέγω οὖν	1	Alternate translation: “I, Paul, say then”
1712	11:1	p4zd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ ἀπώσατο ὁ Θεὸς τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ?	1	Paul asks this question so that he can answer the questions of other Jews who are upset that God has included the Gentiles among his people, while the hearts of the Jewish people have been hardened. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1713	11:1	wqu2			μὴ γένοιτο	1	“That is not possible!” or “Certainly not!” This expression strongly denies that this could happen. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here. See how you translated this in Romans 9:14.
1714	11:1	bc4g			φυλῆς Βενιαμείν	1	This refers to the tribe descended from Benjamin, one of the 12 tribes into which God divided the people of Israel.
1715	11:2	h4qe			ὃν προέγνω	1	Alternate translation: “whom he knew ahead of time”
1716	11:2	cjp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ἐν Ἠλείᾳ τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή, ὡς ἐντυγχάνει τῷ Θεῷ κατὰ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ?	1	You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you know what the Scriptures record about when Elijah pleaded with God against Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1717	11:2	dd1e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή	1	Paul is referring to the scriptures as if they were able to speak. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1718	11:3	fh9i			ἀπέκτειναν	1	Here, they refers to the people of Israel.
1719	11:3	ut1s			κἀγὼ ὑπελείφθην μόνος	1	The pronoun I here refers to Elijah.
1720	11:3	dv5u			ζητοῦσιν τὴν ψυχήν μου	1	Alternate translation: “they want to kill me”
1721	11:4	rj4e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἀλλὰ τί λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ χρηματισμός?	1	Paul is using this question to bring the reader to his next point. Alternate translation: “How does God answer him?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1722	11:4	x6e9			αὐτῷ	1	The pronoun him refers to Elijah.
1723	11:5	ce2r			λῖμμα	1	Here this means a small part of people whom God chose to receive his grace.
1724	11:6	q6es		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰ δὲ χάριτι	1	Paul continues to explain how God’s mercy works. Alternate translation: “But since God’s mercy works by grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1725	11:7	k94b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν?	1	“What should we conclude?” Paul asks this question to move his reader to his next point. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “This is what we need to remember.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1726	11:8	uc8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς πνεῦμα κατανύξεως, ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, καὶ ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν	1	This is a metaphor about the fact that the people are spiritually dull. They are not able to hear or receive spiritual truth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1727	11:8	z47a			πνεῦμα κατανύξεως	1	Here, spirit means “the characteristics of,” such as the “spirit of wisdom.”
1728	11:8	zyk1			ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν	1	The concept of seeing with one’s eyes was considered to be equivalent to gaining understanding.
1729	11:8	ny8w			ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν	1	The concept of hearing with the ears was considered to be equivalent to obedience.
1730	11:9	kpg8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν	1	Here, table here is a metonym that represents feasting. Alternate translation: “Please, God, make their feasts become like a trap” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1731	11:9	l6re		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν	1	Here, net and trap are metaphors that represent punishment. Alternate translation: (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1732	11:9	x0wl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Please, God, make their feasts like a trap that catches them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1733	11:9	ya1g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκάνδαλον	1	A stumbling block is anything that causes a person to trip so that he falls down. Here it represents something that tempts a person to sin. Alternate translation: “something that tempts them to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1734	11:9	xex5			ἀνταπόδομα αὐτοῖς	1	Alternate translation: “something that allows you to take revenge on them”
1735	11:10	c1nj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν νῶτον αὐτῶν διὰ παντὸς σύνκαμψον	1	Here, make their backs bend is a metonym for forcing slaves to carry heavy loads on their backs. Alternate translation: “make them continually carry heavy loads” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1736	11:10	biqg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸν νῶτον αὐτῶν διὰ παντὸς σύνκαμψον	1	This is a metaphor for making them suffer. Alternate translation: “make them continually suffer like people carrying heavy loads” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1737	11:11	z8tw			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: With Israel as a nation rejecting God, Paul warns the Gentiles to be careful they do not make the same mistake.
1738	11:11	r9hg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ ἔπταισαν ἵνα πέσωσιν?	1	Paul uses this question to add emphasis. Alternate translation: “Has God rejected them forever because they sinned?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1739	11:11	qbx4			μὴ γένοιτο!	1	“That is not possible!” or “Certainly not!” This expression strongly denies that this could happen. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here. See how you translated this in Romans 9:14.
1740	11:11	f1jw			παραζηλῶσαι αὐτούς	1	See how you translated this phrase in Romans 10:19.
1741	11:12	ew4i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	εἰ & τὸ παράπτωμα αὐτῶν, πλοῦτος κόσμου, καὶ τὸ ἥττημα αὐτῶν, πλοῦτος ἐθνῶν	1	Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. If you need to, you can combine them in your translation. Alternate translation: “when the Jews failed spiritually, the result was that God abundantly blessed the non-Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1742	11:12	dh1g			πλοῦτος ἐθνῶν	1	Because the Jews rejected Christ, God richly blessed the Gentiles by giving them the opportunity to receive Christ.
1743	11:12	it9k			κόσμου	1	Here the world is a metonym that refers to the people who live in the world, especially the Gentiles.
1744	11:14	ua2k			παραζηλώσω	1	See how you translated this phrase in Romans 10:19.
1745	11:14	h1qe			μου τὴν σάρκα	1	This refers to Paul’s fellow Jews.
1746	11:14	gp38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ σώσω τινὰς ἐξ αὐτῶν	1	God will save those who believe. Alternate translation: “and perhaps some will believe and God will save them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1747	11:15	es22			εἰ γὰρ ἡ ἀποβολὴ αὐτῶν καταλλαγὴ κόσμου	1	Alternate translation: “For if because God rejected them, he will reconcile the rest of the world to himself”
1748	11:15	ui3i			ἡ ἀποβολὴ αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun their refers to Jewish unbelievers.
1749	11:15	m3fs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κόσμου	1	Here, the world is a metonym for the people who live in the world. Alternate translation: “the people in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1750	11:15	em8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς ἡ πρόσλημψις εἰ μὴ ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν?	1	Paul asks this question to emphasize that when God accepts the Jews, it will be a wonderful thing. Alternate translation: “how will it be when God accepts them? It will be like they have come back to life from among the dead!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1751	11:15	civ7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τίς ἡ πρόσλημψις εἰ μὴ ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν?	1	You can translate it in an active form. Alternate translation: “then when God accepts them, it will be like they have died and become alive again!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1752	11:15	jn4l			νεκρῶν	1	These words speak of all dead people together in the underworld.
1753	11:16	b2s5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀπαρχὴ ἁγία, καὶ τὸ φύραμα;	1	Paul is speaking of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, the Israelites’ ancestors, as if they were the first grain or firstfruits to be harvested. He is also speaking of the Israelites who are descendants of those men as if they were a lump of dough that they made from the grain. Alternate translation: “If Abraham is counted as the first of what has been offered to God, all of our ancestors who followed should also be counted as God’s possession” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1754	11:16	dci1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰ ἡ ῥίζα ἁγία, καὶ οἱ κλάδοι	1	Paul is speaking of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, the Israelites’ ancestors, as if they were the root of a tree, and the Israelites who are descendants of those men, as if they were the branches of the tree. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1755	11:16	d1zi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἁγία	1	The people always dedicated to God the first crops that they harvested. Here, “firstfruits” stands for the first people to believe in Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1756	11:17	slf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰ δέ τινες τῶν κλάδων ἐξεκλάσθησαν	1	Here Paul refers to the Jews who rejected Jesus as branches that were broken off. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1757	11:17	b8ic		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰ δέ τινες τῶν κλάδων ἐξεκλάσθησαν	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “But if someone broke off some of the branches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1758	11:17	qv65			σὺ δὲ ἀγριέλαιος ὢν	1	The pronoun you, and the phrase a wild olive branch, refer to the Gentile people who have accepted salvation through Jesus.
1759	11:17	z6hr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνεκεντρίσθης ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	Here Paul speaks of the Gentile Christians as if they were grafted into the faith of Abraham and the Jewish patriarchs. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1760	11:17	lb1p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐνεκεντρίσθης ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God attached you to the tree among the remaining branches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1761	11:17	s9w3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῆς ῥίζης τῆς πιότητος τῆς ἐλαίας ἐγένου	1	Here, the richness of the root is a metaphor that refers to the promises of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1762	11:18	gqd6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ κατακαυχῶ τῶν κλάδων	1	Here, the branches is a metaphor that stands for the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “do not say you are better than the Jewish people God has rejected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1763	11:18	llz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐ σὺ τὴν ῥίζαν βαστάζεις, ἀλλὰ ἡ ῥίζα σέ	1	Again Paul implies that the Gentile believers are branches that are connected to the root of the faith of the Abraham and the Jewish patriarchs. God saves them only because of the covenant promises that he made to the Jews. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1764	11:19	mm6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι	1	Branches here refer to the Jews who rejected Jesus and whom God has now rejected. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1765	11:19	qk8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God broke branches off” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1766	11:19	p9ti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ	1	Paul uses this phrase to refer to the Gentile believers whom God has accepted. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1767	11:19	z9l9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “he might attach me in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1768	11:20	puj9			τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ ἐξεκλάσθησαν	1	The pronouns They and their refer to the Jewish people who did not believe.
1769	11:20	v2ua		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σὺ δὲ τῇ πίστει ἕστηκας	1	Paul speaks of the Gentile believers remaining faithful as if they were standing firm and no one could move them. Alternate translation: “but you remain because of your faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1770	11:21	f6i7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰ γὰρ ὁ Θεὸς τῶν κατὰ φύσιν κλάδων οὐκ ἐφείσατο, οὐδὲ σοῦ φείσεται	1	Here the natural branches refer to the Jewish people who rejected Jesus. Alternate translation: “Since God did not spare those unbelieving Jews, who grew up like a tree’s natural branches that came from the root, then know, if you do not believe, he will not spare you either” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1771	11:22	xdm3			χρηστότητα καὶ ἀποτομίαν Θεοῦ	1	Paul is reminding the Gentile believers that although God may act very kindly toward them, he will not hesitate to judge and punish them.
1772	11:22	p691		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ μὲν τοὺς πεσόντας, ἀποτομία; ἐπὶ δὲ σὲ, χρηστότης Θεοῦ	1	This can be restated to remove the abstract nouns severity and kindness. Alternate translation: “God dealt harshly with the Jews who fell, but God acts kindly toward you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1773	11:22	scf8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς πεσόντας	1	Doing what is wrong is spoken of as if it is falling down. Alternate translation: “the Jews who have done wrong” or “the Jews who have refused to trust in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1774	11:22	z41m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐὰν ἐπιμένῃς τῇ χρηστότητι	1	This can be restated to remove the abstract noun kindness. Alternate translation: “if you continue doing what is right so that he continues being kind to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1775	11:22	t4mk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπεὶ καὶ σὺ ἐκκοπήσῃ	1	Paul again uses the metaphor of a branch, which God can cut off if he needs to. Here, cut off is a metaphor for rejecting someone. Alternate translation: “Otherwise you will be rejected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1776	11:22	l17i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπεὶ καὶ σὺ ἐκκοπήσῃ	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Otherwise God will cut you off” or “Otherwise God will reject you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1777	11:23	lvk7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν μὴ ἐπιμένωσι τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ	1	The phrase do not continue in their unbelief is a double negative. You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “if the Jews start believing in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1778	11:23	zu7k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνκεντρισθήσονται	1	Paul speaks of the Jews as if they were branches that could be grafted back into a tree if they start to believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1779	11:23	lx11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐνκεντρισθήσονται	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will graft them back in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1780	11:23	yjj6			ἐνκεντρίσαι	1	This is a common process where the end of a live branch of one tree is inserted into another tree so that the new branch will continue to grow in that tree.
1781	11:23	r5kg			κἀκεῖνοι & αὐτούς	1	The occurrences of they and them refer to the Jews.
1782	11:24	s1a4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰ γὰρ σὺ ἐκ τῆς κατὰ φύσιν ἐξεκόπης ἀγριελαίου, καὶ παρὰ φύσιν ἐνεκεντρίσθης εἰς καλλιέλαιον, πόσῳ μᾶλλον οὗτοι, οἱ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνκεντρισθήσονται τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐλαίᾳ	1	Paul continues speaking of the Gentile believers and Jews as if they were branches of a tree. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1783	11:24	dem3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰ γὰρ σὺ ἐκ τῆς κατὰ φύσιν ἐξεκόπης ἀγριελαίου, καὶ παρὰ φύσιν ἐνεκεντρίσθης εἰς καλλιέλαιον, πόσῳ μᾶλλον οὗτοι, οἱ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνκεντρισθήσονται τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐλαίᾳ?	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For if God had cut you out of what is by nature a wild olive tree, and contrary to nature had grafted you into a good olive tree, how much more will he graft these Jews, who are the natural branches, into their own olive tree?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1784	11:24	yn21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ κατὰ φύσιν	1	Paul continues speaking of the Jews and Gentiles as if they were branches. The branches according to nature represent the Jews who were originally connected to the faith of Abraham and the Jewish patriarchs. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1785	11:25	ye5w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ & θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν	1	Here Paul uses a double negative. You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “I very much want you to be aware” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1786	11:25	w7lx			ἀδελφοί	1	Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.
1787	11:25	q3i2			θέλω	1	Here the pronoun I refers to Paul.
1788	11:25	sf4v			ὑμᾶς & ἦτε & ἑαυτοῖς	1	The pronouns you and yourselves refer to the Gentile believers.
1789	11:25	me1g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἵνα μὴ ἦτε παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς φρόνιμοι	1	Paul does not want the Gentile believers to think they are wiser than the Jewish unbelievers. Alternate translation: “so that you will not think you are wiser than you are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1790	11:25	ec4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πώρωσις ἀπὸ μέρους τῷ Ἰσραὴλ γέγονεν	1	Paul speaks of stubbornness as if it were a hardening of physical organs in the body. Some Jews have refused to accept salvation through Jesus. Alternate translation: “many people of Israel continue to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1791	11:25	db1x			ἄχρι οὗ τὸ πλήρωμα τῶν ἐθνῶν εἰσέλθῃ	1	The word until here implies that a portion Jews will refuse to believe until after God has finished bringing the Gentiles into the church.
1792	11:26	ds7a			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul says that a deliverer will come out of Israel to the glory of God.
1793	11:26	vu7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ οὕτως πᾶς Ἰσραὴλ σωθήσεται	1	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and thus God will save all Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1794	11:26	n7yf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “just as the scriptures record” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1795	11:26	dm4e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ Σιὼν	1	Here, Zion is used as a metonym for the place where God dwells. Alternate translation: “From where God is among the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1796	11:26	v96c			ὁ ῥυόμενος	1	Alternate translation: “the one who brings his people to safety”
1797	11:26	at55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀποστρέψει ἀσεβείας	1	Paul speaks of ungodliness as if it were an object that someone could remove, perhaps like someone removes a garment. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1798	11:26	bkr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀπὸ Ἰακώβ	1	Here, Jacob is used as a metonym for Israel. Alternate translation: “from the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1799	11:27	ll39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀφέλωμαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν	1	Here Paul speaks of sins as if they were objects that someone could take away. Alternate translation: “I will remove the burden of their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1800	11:28	ctn9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ μὲν τὸ εὐαγγέλιον	1	You can make explicit why Paul mentions the gospel. Alternate translation: “Because the Jews rejected the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1801	11:28	x6aa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐχθροὶ δι’ ὑμᾶς	1	You can make explicit whose enemies they are, and how this was for the Gentiles’ sake. Alternate translation: “they are God’s enemies for your sake” or “God has treated them as enemies in order that you also might hear the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1802	11:28	dr2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ & τὴν ἐκλογὴν	2	You can make explicit why Paul mentions election. Alternate translation: “because God has elected the Jews” or “because God has chosen the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1803	11:28	jas2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀγαπητοὶ διὰ τοὺς πατέρας	1	You can make explicit who loves the Jews and why Paul mentions their forefathers. Alternate translation: “they are loved by God because of what he promised to do for their ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1804	11:28	d82k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀγαπητοὶ διὰ τοὺς πατέρας	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God still loves them because of what he promised to do for their ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1805	11:29	p2sf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀμεταμέλητα γὰρ τὰ χαρίσματα καὶ ἡ κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul speaks of the spiritual and material blessings that God promised to give his people as if they were gifts. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1806	11:29	mnqs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀμεταμέλητα γὰρ τὰ χαρίσματα καὶ ἡ κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The call of God refers to the fact that God called the Jews to be his people. Alternate translation: “For God never changed his mind about what he has promised to give them, and about how he has called them to be his people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1807	11:30	bj8g			ὑμεῖς ποτε ἠπειθήσατε	1	Alternate translation: “you did not obey in the past”
1808	11:30	df91		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἠλεήθητε τῇ τούτων ἀπειθείᾳ	1	Here, mercy means God’s undeserved blessings. Alternate translation: “because the Jews have rejected Jesus, you have received blessings that you did not deserve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1809	11:30	g3cn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὑμεῖς	1	Here, you refers to Gentile believers, and is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1810	11:32	t6cb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνέκλεισεν & ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς πάντας εἰς ἀπείθειαν	1	God has treated people who disobey him like prisoners who are unable to escape from prison. Alternate translation: “God has made prisoners of those who disobey him. Now they cannot stop disobeying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1811	11:33	x3kb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ὦ βάθος πλούτου, καὶ σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως Θεοῦ	1	Here, wisdom and knowledge mean basically the same thing. Alternate translation: “How amazing are the many benefits of both God’s wisdom and knowledge!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1812	11:33	u322			ὡς ἀνεξεραύνητα τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀνεξιχνίαστοι αἱ ὁδοὶ αὐτοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “We are completely unable to understand the things that he has decided and find out the ways in which he acts toward us”
1813	11:34	r2wj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς γὰρ ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ἢ τίς σύμβουλος αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο?	1	Paul uses this question to emphasize that no one is as wise as the Lord. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one has ever known the mind of the Lord, and no one has become his advisor.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1814	11:34	yy52		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	νοῦν Κυρίου	1	Here, mind is a metonym for knowing things or thinking about things. Alternate translation: “all that the Lord knows” or “what the Lord thinks about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1815	11:35	j5cn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ?	1	Paul uses this question to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “No one has ever given anything to God that he did not first receive from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1816	11:36	abc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξ αὐτοῦ, καὶ δι’ αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἰς αὐτὸν, τὰ πάντα. αὐτῷ	1	Here, all occurrences of him refer to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1817	11:36	rpx6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας	1	This expresses Paul’s desire for all people to honor God. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “May all people honor him forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1818	12:intro	aky9				0	Romans 12 General Notes Structure and formatting Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13) How to act toward God (12:1–2) How to serve the church (12:3–8) How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13) How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21) How to act toward government (13:1–7) How to act toward other people (13:8–10) Act as if the end is near (13:11–14) Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12) Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23) Be united with other Christians (15:1–13) Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 20, which are from the Old Testament. Many scholars believe Paul uses the word therefore in Romans 12:1 to refer back to all of Chapters 1-11. Having carefully explained the Christian gospel, Paul now explains how Christians should live in light of these great truths. Chapters 12-16 focus on living out one’s Christian faith. Paul uses many different commands in these chapters to give these practical instructions. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) Special concepts in this chapter Christian living Under the law of Moses, people were required to offer temple sacrifices of animals or grain. Now Christians are required to live their lives as a type of sacrifice to God. Physical sacrifices are no longer required. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]]) Important figures of speech in this chapter Body of Christ The body of Christ is an important metaphor or image used in Scripture to refer to the church. Each church member plays a unique and important function. Christians need each other. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/body]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1819	12:1	rhs3			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul tells what the life of a believer should be and how believers should serve.
1820	12:1	d2y3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, διὰ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, brothers refers to fellow believers, both male and female. Alternate translation: “Fellow believers, because of the great mercy that God has given you I very much want you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1821	12:1	w1mz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν θυσίαν ζῶσαν	1	Here Paul uses the word bodies to refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “to offer yourselves completely to God as a living sacrifice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1822	12:1	wuyl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν θυσίαν ζῶσαν	1	Paul is comparing a believer in Christ who completely obeys God to the animals that the Jews killed and then offered to God. Alternate translation: “to offer yourselves completely to God while you are alive as if you were a dead sacrifice on a temple altar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1823	12:1	dwr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἁγίαν, εὐάρεστον, τῷ Θεῷ	1	This could refer to: (1) a sacrifice that you give to God alone and that pleases him. (2) a sacrifice that is acceptable to God because it is morally pure. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1824	12:1	tyk7			τὴν λογικὴν λατρείαν ὑμῶν	1	Alternate translation: “which is the right way to worship God”
1825	12:2	clc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ συνσχηματίζεσθε τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ	1	This could mean: (1) do not behave as the world behaves. (2) do not think the way the world does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1826	12:2	pyb6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ συνσχηματίζεσθε τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ	1	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “do not act and think like the world does” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1827	12:2	d2qq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ	1	Here, this world refers to unbelievers who live in the world. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1828	12:2	na8p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀλλὰ μεταμορφοῦσθε τῇ ἀνακαινώσει τοῦ νοός	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “but let God change the way you think” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1829	12:3	nyc2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τῆς χάριτος τῆς δοθείσης μοι	1	Here, grace refers to God’s choosing Paul to be an apostle and leader of the church. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “through the grace that caused me to become an apostle” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1830	12:3	l6c6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διὰ τῆς χάριτος τῆς δοθείσης μοι	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “because God freely chose me to be an apostle” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1831	12:3	s6yg			παντὶ τῷ ὄντι ἐν ὑμῖν, μὴ ὑπερφρονεῖν παρ’ ὃ δεῖ φρονεῖν	1	Alternate translation: “that no one among you should think they are better than they are”
1832	12:3	me4t			ἀλλὰ φρονεῖν εἰς τὸ σωφρονεῖν	1	Alternate translation: “but you should be wise in how you think about yourselves”
1833	12:3	m8z7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἑκάστῳ ὡς ὁ Θεὸς ἐμέρισεν μέτρον πίστεως	1	Paul implies here that believers have different abilities that correspond to their faith in God. Alternate translation: “since God has given each of you the faith to trust in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1834	12:4	zm8p			γὰρ	1	Paul the word For to show that he will now explain why some Christians should not think they are better than others.
1835	12:4	v2pi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, πολλὰ μέλη ἔχομεν	1	Paul refers to all the believers in Christ as if they were different parts of the human body. He does this to illustrate that although believers may serve Christ in different ways, each person belongs to Christ and serves in an important way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1836	12:4	v5iy			μέλη	1	Here, members are such things as eyes, stomachs, and hands.
1837	12:5	dhx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ δὲ καθ’ εἷς ἀλλήλων μέλη	1	Paul speaks of the believers as if God had physically joined them together like the parts of the human body. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1838	12:5	cutl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ δὲ καθ’ εἷς ἀλλήλων μέλη	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God has joined each believer together with all other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1839	12:6	hrr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔχοντες δὲ χαρίσματα κατὰ τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν διάφορα	1	Paul speaks of believers’ different abilities as being free gifts from God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1840	12:6	y267		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔχοντες δὲ χαρίσματα κατὰ τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν διάφορα	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God has freely given each of us the ability to do different things for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1841	12:6	bnk9			κατὰ τὴν ἀναλογίαν τῆς πίστεως	1	This could mean: (1) he should speak prophecies that do not go beyond the amount of faith God has given us. (2) he should speak prophecies that agree with the teachings of our faith.
1842	12:8	m2as		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ μεταδιδοὺς	1	Here, giving refers to giving money and other things to people. You can make this meaning explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “if one has the gift of giving money or other goods to people in need” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1843	12:9	iv5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ ἀγάπη ἀνυπόκριτος	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “You must love people sincerely and truly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1844	12:9	eaw7			ἡ ἀγάπη	1	The word Paul uses here refers to the kind of love that comes from God and focuses on the good of others, even when it does not benefit oneself.
1845	12:10	mr8i			τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ	1	This is another word that means brotherly love or love for a friend or family member. This is natural human love between friends or relatives.
1846	12:10	ng86			τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ & φιλόστοργοι	1	Here Paul begins a list of nine items, each of the form in … be to tell the believers what kind of people they should be. You may need to translate some of the items as “in … do.” The list continues to Romans 12:13.
1847	12:10	ux2y			τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ	1	Alternate translation: “as for how you love your fellow believers”
1848	12:10	tj57			τῇ τιμῇ ἀλλήλους προηγούμενοι	1	Alternate translation: “honor and respect one another” or “honor your fellow believers by respecting them”
1849	12:11	iu2i			τῇ σπουδῇ μὴ ὀκνηροί, τῷ πνεύματι ζέοντες, τῷ Κυρίῳ δουλεύοντες	1	Alternate translation: “do not be lazy in your duty, but be eager to follow the Spirit and to serve the Lord”
1850	12:12	l3es			τῇ θλίψει ὑπομένοντες	1	Alternate translation: “wait patiently whenever you have troubles”
1851	12:13	vk5h			ταῖς χρείαις τῶν ἁγίων κοινωνοῦντες	1	Alternate translation: “when fellow Christians are in trouble, help them with what they need”
1852	12:13	exd8			τὴν φιλοξενίαν διώκοντες	1	This is the last item in the list that began in Romans 12:9. “always welcome them into your home when they need a place to stay”
1853	12:16	hwd1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὸ αὐτὸ εἰς ἀλλήλους φρονοῦντες	1	This is an idiom that means to live in unity. Alternate translation: “agreeing with one another” or “living in unity with each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1854	12:16	ar7y			μὴ τὰ ὑψηλὰ φρονοῦντες	1	Alternate translation: “do not think that you are more important than others”
1855	12:16	cc23			τοῖς ταπεινοῖς συναπαγόμενοι	1	Alternate translation: “welcome people who do not seem important”
1856	12:16	h469			μὴ γίνεσθε φρόνιμοι παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς	1	Alternate translation: “Do not think of yourselves as having more wisdom than everyone else”
1857	12:17	h2tz			μηδενὶ κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ ἀποδιδόντες	1	Alternate translation: “do not do evil things to someone who has done evil things to you”
1858	12:17	fzh8			προνοούμενοι καλὰ ἐνώπιον πάντων ἀνθρώπων	1	Alternate translation: “do things that everyone considers to be good”
1859	12:18	pgt7			τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν, μετὰ πάντων ἀνθρώπων εἰρηνεύοντες	1	Alternate translation: “do whatever you can to live in peace with everyone”
1860	12:19	ew6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	δότε τόπον τῇ ὀργῇ	1	Here, wrath is a metonym for God’s punishment. Alternate translation: “allow God to punish them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1861	12:19	ns3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται γάρ	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “for someone has written” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1862	12:19	l2i8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις; ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that God will avenge his people. Alternate translation: “I will certainly avenge you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1863	12:20	c4ig		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὁ ἐχθρός σου & σωρεύσεις	1	The pronouns your and you are singular and addressed as to one person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1864	12:20	q7dq			ἀλλὰ ἐὰν πεινᾷ ὁ ἐχθρός σου, ψώμιζε αὐτόν; ἐὰν διψᾷ, πότιζε αὐτόν; τοῦτο γὰρ ποιῶν, ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ.	1	In 12:20 Paul quotes another part of scripture. Alternate translation: “But the scripture also says, ‘If your enemy is hungry, feed him. If he is thirsty, give him a drink. For doing this, you will heap coals of fire on his head’”
1865	12:20	wce6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ	1	Paul speaks of the blessings that the enemies will receive as if someone were pouring hot coals on their heads. This could mean: (1) you will make the person who harmed you feel badly about how he has mistreated you. (2) you will give God a reason to judge your enemy more harshly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1866	12:21	q761		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκα ἐν τῷ ἀγαθῷ τὸ κακόν	1	Paul describes evil as though it were a person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1867	12:21	k8et		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Do not let those who are evil defeat you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1868	12:21	p7fd			μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκα & τὸ κακόν	1	These verbs are addressed as to one person and so are singular.
1869	13:intro	l4q7				0	Romans 13 General Notes Structure and formatting Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13) How to act toward God (12:1–2) How to serve the church (12:3–8) How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13) How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21) How to act toward government (13:1–7) How to act toward other people (13:8–10) Act as if the end is near (13:11–14) In the first part of this chapter, Paul teaches Christians to obey rulers who govern them. At that time, ungodly Roman rulers governed the land. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]]) Special concepts in this chapter Ungodly rulers When Paul teaches about obeying rulers, some readers will find this difficult to understand, especially in places where rulers persecute the church. Christians must obey their rulers as well as obey God, unless the rulers do not allow Christians to do something God explicitly commands them to do. There are times when a believer must submit to these rulers and suffer at their hands. Christians understand that this world is temporary and they will ultimately be with God forever. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter Flesh This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
1870	13:1	v5ik			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul tells believers how to live under their rulers.
1871	13:1	b8nf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	πᾶσα ψυχὴ & ὑποτασσέσθω	1	Here, soul is a synecdoche for the whole person. “Let every Christian obey” or “Everyone should obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1872	13:1	g1by			ἐξουσίαις ὑπερεχούσαις	1	Alternate translation: “submit to government officials”
1873	13:1	wii2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ & ἔστιν ἐξουσία, εἰ μὴ ὑπὸ Θεοῦ	1	This is a double negative. You can translate it in a positive form. Alternate translation: “all authority comes from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1874	13:1	j3lr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αἱ δὲ οὖσαι ὑπὸ Θεοῦ τεταγμέναι εἰσίν	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “And the people who are in authority are there because God put them there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1875	13:2	ui8y			τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ	1	Alternate translation: “that government authority” or “the authority that God placed in power”
1876	13:2	dsa3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ & ἀνθεστηκότες, ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will judge those who oppose government authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1877	13:3	m3yf			γὰρ	1	Paul uses this word to begin his explanation of Romans 13:2 and to tell about what will result if the government condemns a person.
1878	13:3	c2xa			οἱ & ἄρχοντες οὐκ εἰσὶν φόβος	1	Rulers do not make good people afraid.
1879	13:3	jt2z			τῷ ἀγαθῷ ἔργῳ, & τῷ κακῷ	1	People are identified with their good deeds or evil deeds.
1880	13:3	z4sq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	θέλεις δὲ μὴ φοβεῖσθαι τὴν ἐξουσίαν?	1	Paul uses this question to get people to think about what they need to do in order not to be afraid of rulers. Alternate translation: “Let me tell you how you can be unafraid of the ruler.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1881	13:3	ahl9			ἕξεις ἔπαινον ἐξ αὐτῆς	1	The government will say good things about people who do what is good.
1882	13:4	ink8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ & εἰκῇ τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ	1	You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “he carries the sword for a very good reason” or “he has the power to punish people, and he will punish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1883	13:4	s3vz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ	1	Roman governors carried a short sword as a symbol of their authority. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1884	13:4	au7j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἔκδικος εἰς ὀργὴν	1	Here, wrath represents the punishment people receive when they do evil deeds. Alternate translation: “a person who punishes people as an expression of the government’s anger against evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1885	13:5	q81v			οὐ μόνον διὰ τὴν ὀργὴν, ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν	1	Alternate translation: “not only so the government will not punish you, but also so you will have a clear conscience before God”
1886	13:6	r1jy			διὰ τοῦτο	1	Alternate translation: “because the government punishes evildoers”
1887	13:6	r4b3			τελεῖτε	1	Paul is addressing the believers here, so this verb is plural.
1888	13:6	hy4f			γὰρ & εἰσιν	2	Alternate translation: “This is why you should pay taxes: authorities are”
1889	13:7	z9cn			ἀπόδοτε πᾶσι	1	Paul is addressing the believers here, so this verb is plural.
1890	13:7	wg2l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τῷ τὸν φόρον, τὸν φόρον; τῷ τὸ τέλος, τὸ τέλος; τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν	1	The word “pay” is understood from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “pay tax to whom tax is due and toll to whom toll is due. Pay fear to whom fear is due and honor to him to whom honor is due” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1891	13:7	nwi2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν	1	Here paying fear and honor is a metaphor for fearing and honoring those who deserve to be feared and honored. Alternate translation: “Fear those who deserve to be feared, and honor those who deserved to be honored” or “Respect those whom you ought to respect, and honor those whom you ought to honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1892	13:7	s2nf			τὸ τέλος	1	This is a kind of tax.
1893	13:8	s8pb			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul tells believers how to act toward neighbors.
1894	13:8	a69g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μηδενὶ μηδὲν ὀφείλετε, εἰ μὴ τὸ ἀλλήλους ἀγαπᾶν	1	This is a double negative. You can translate it in a positive form. Alternate translation: “Pay all you owe to everyone, and fulfill your obligation to love one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1895	13:8	ay3n			εἰ μὴ τὸ ἀλλήλους ἀγαπᾶν	1	This is the one debt that can remain.
1896	13:8	p6cw			ὀφείλετε	1	This verb is plural and applies to all the Christians in Rome.
1897	13:8	i5au			ἀγαπᾶν	1	This refers to the kind of love that comes from God and focuses on the good of others, even when it does not benefit oneself.
1898	13:10	vy62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ ἀγάπη τῷ πλησίον κακὸν οὐκ ἐργάζεται	1	This phrase portrays love as a person who is being kind to other people. Alternate translation: “People who love their neighbors do not harm them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1899	13:11	b6l3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰδότες τὸν καιρόν, ὅτι ὥρα ἤδη ὑμᾶς ἐξ ὕπνου ἐγερθῆναι	1	Paul speaks of the need for the Roman believers to change their behavior as if they needed to wake up from being asleep. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1900	13:12	ahn4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ νὺξ προέκοψεν	1	Paul speaks of the time when people do evil deeds as night. Alternate translation: “The sinful time is almost over” or “It is as though the night is almost finished” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1901	13:12	p7xp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ & ἡμέρα ἤγγικεν	2	Paul speaks of the time when people do what is right as the day. Alternate translation: “the time of righteousness will begin soon” or “it is as though it will soon be day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1902	13:12	bb8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀποθώμεθα οὖν τὰ ἔργα τοῦ σκότους	1	Paul speaks of works of darkness as if they are clothing that a person puts aside. Here to put aside means to stop doing something. Here, darkness is a metaphor for evil. Alternate translation: “Let us therefore stop doing the evil things that people do in the dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1903	13:12	y5n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνδυσώμεθα & τὰ ὅπλα τοῦ φωτός	1	Here, light is a metaphor for what is good and right. Paul speaks of doing what is right as if it were putting on armor to protect one’s self. Alternate translation: “let us start doing what is right. Doing this will protect us from what is evil like armor protects a solider” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1904	13:13	gv4q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	περιπατήσωμεν	1	Paul includes his readers and other believers with himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1905	13:13	e6ij		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὡς ἐν ἡμέρᾳ εὐσχημόνως περιπατήσωμεν	1	Paul speaks of living as true believers as if one were walking while it is day. Alternate translation: “Let us walk in a visible way knowing that everyone can see us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1906	13:13	qes3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	κοίταις καὶ ἀσελγείαις	1	These concepts mean basically the same thing. You can combine them in your translation. Alternate translation: “in sexually immoral acts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1907	13:13	h6xl			ἔριδι	1	This refers to plotting against and arguing with other people.
1908	13:14	sir6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνδύσασθε τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν	1	Paul speaks of accepting the moral nature of Christ as if he were our outer clothing that people can see. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1909	13:14	j795			ἐνδύσασθε	1	If your language has a plural form for commands, use it here.
1910	13:14	xre7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῆς σαρκὸς πρόνοιαν μὴ ποιεῖσθε	1	Here the flesh refers to the self-directed nature of people who oppose God. This is the sinful nature of human beings. Alternate translation: “do not allow your old evil heart any opportunity at all for doing wicked things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1911	14:intro	kt8c				0	Romans 14 General Notes Structure and formatting Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13) How to act toward God (12:1–2) How to serve the church (12:3–8) How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13) How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21) How to act toward government (13:1–7) How to act toward other people (13:8–10) Act as if the end is near (13:11–14) Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12) Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23) Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 11 of this chapter, which Paul quotes from the Old Testament. Special concepts in this chapter Weak in faith Paul teaches that Christians can have real faith and at the same time be “weak in faith” in a given situation. This describes Christians whose faith is immature, not strong, or misunderstood. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) Dietary restrictions Many religions in the ancient Near East restricted what was eaten. Christians have freedom to eat what they want. But they need to use this freedom wisely, in a way that honors the Lord and does not cause others to sin. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) The judgment seat of God The judgment seat of God or Christ represents a time when all people, including Christians, will be held accountable for the way they lived their lives.
1912	14:1	abm6			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul encourages believers to remember that they are answerable to God.
1913	14:1	jf8v			ἀσθενοῦντα τῇ πίστει	1	This refers to those who felt guilty over eating and drinking certain things.
1914	14:1	p697			μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν	1	Alternate translation: “and do not condemn them for their opinions”
1915	14:2	ii8g			ὃς μὲν πιστεύει φαγεῖν πάντα	1	Some people believe God permits them to eat any kind of food.
1916	14:2	n2n6			ὁ & ἀσθενῶν λάχανα ἐσθίει	1	This describes a person who believes God does not want him to eat meat.
1917	14:4	q9bx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	σὺ τίς εἶ, ὁ κρίνων ἀλλότριον οἰκέτην?	1	Paul is using a question to scold those who are judging others. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “You are not God, and you are not allowed to judge one of his servants!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1918	14:4	xq7r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	σὺ & ὁ κρίνων	1	The form of you here is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1919	14:4	ba38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ ἰδίῳ κυρίῳ στήκει ἢ πίπτει	1	Paul speaks of God as if he were a master who owned slaves. Alternate translation: “Only the master can decide if he will accept the slave or not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1920	14:4	cp9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σταθήσεται δέ, δυνατεῖ γὰρ ὁ Κύριος στῆσαι αὐτόν	1	Paul speaks of the servant who is acceptable to God as if he were being made to stand instead of falling. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1921	14:4	ucto		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σταθήσεται δέ, δυνατεῖ γὰρ ὁ Κύριος στῆσαι αὐτόν	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “But the Lord will accept him because he is able to make the servant acceptable” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1922	14:5	x7j2			ὃς μὲν κρίνει ἡμέραν παρ’ ἡμέραν; ὃς δὲ κρίνει πᾶσαν ἡμέραν.	1	Alternate translation: “One person thinks one day is more important than all the others, but another person thinks that all days are the same”
1923	14:5	m511		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ νοῒ, πληροφορείσθω	1	You can make the full meaning explicit. Alternate translation: “Let each person be convinced that he is honoring the Lord by what he does” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1924	14:5	y5ea		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ νοῒ, πληροφορείσθω	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Let each person be sure what he is doing is to honor the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1925	14:6	pfn6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ φρονῶν τὴν ἡμέραν, Κυρίῳ φρονεῖ	1	Here, observes refers to worshiping. Alternate translation: “The person who worships on a certain day does it to honor the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1926	14:6	esu5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὁ ἐσθίων	1	The word “everything” is understood from Romans 14:3. It can be repeatd here. Alternate translation: “the person who eats every kind of food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1927	14:6	f9tm			Κυρίῳ ἐσθίει	1	Alternate translation: “eats to honor the Lord” or “eats that way in order to honor the Lord”
1928	14:6	jh8j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ ὁ μὴ ἐσθίων	1	The word “everything” is understood from Romans 14:3. It can be repeated here. Alternate translation: “and he who does not eat everything” or “and the person who does not eat certain kinds of food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1929	14:7	txm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδεὶς γὰρ ἡμῶν ἑαυτῷ ζῇ	1	Here, lives for himself means to live only to please oneself. Alternate translation: “None of us should live merely to please ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1930	14:7	u9ar		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οὐδεὶς & ἡμῶν	1	Paul is including his readers, so this is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1931	14:7	c9ls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδεὶς ἑαυτῷ ἀποθνῄσκει	1	This means anyone’s death affects other people. Alternate translation: “none of us should think that when we die, it affects only us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1932	14:8	s3lb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	General Information:	0	General Information: Paul is speaking of both himself and his readers, so all instances of “we” are inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1933	14:10	db9a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί κρίνεις τὸν ἀδελφόν σου? ἢ καὶ σὺ τί ἐξουθενεῖς τὸν ἀδελφόν σου?	1	By using these questions, Paul is demonstrating how he might need to scold individuals among his readers. Alternate translation: “it is wrong for you to judge your brother, and it is wrong for you to despise your brother!” or “stop judging and despising your brother!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1934	14:10	al55			τὸν ἀδελφόν	1	Here, brother means a fellow Christian, male or female.
1935	14:10	jq85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πάντες γὰρ παραστησόμεθα τῷ βήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The judgment seat refers to God’s authority to judge. Alternate translation: “For God will judge us all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1936	14:11	fel6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται γάρ	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For someone has written in the scriptures:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1937	14:11	tf76		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζῶ ἐγώ	1	This phrase is used to start an oath or solemn promise. Alternate translation: “You can be certain that this is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1938	14:11	sb6q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐμοὶ κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ	1	Paul uses the word God and tongue to refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “every person will bow and give praise to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1939	14:11	vngp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἐμοὶ κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ	1	The Lord uses the word God to refer to himself. Alternate translation: “every person will bow and give praise to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1940	14:12	nsy8			περὶ ἑαυτοῦ, λόγον δώσει τῷ Θεῷ	1	Alternate translation: “will have to explain our actions to God”
1941	14:13	ia62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἀλλὰ τοῦτο κρίνατε μᾶλλον, τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ ἢ σκάνδαλον	1	Here, stumbling block and snare mean basically the same thing. Alternate translation: “but instead make it your goal not to do or say anything that might cause a fellow believer to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1942	14:13	cx4s			τῷ ἀδελφῷ	1	Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian, male or female.
1943	14:14	t7gc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	οἶδα καὶ πέπεισμαι ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here the words know and am persuaded mean basically the same thing; Paul uses them to emphasize his certainty. Alternate translation: “I am certain because of my relationship with the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1944	14:14	fuk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐδὲν κοινὸν δι’ ἑαυτοῦ	1	You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “everything by itself is clean” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1945	14:14	mjc5			δι’ ἑαυτοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “by its nature” or “because of what it is”
1946	14:14	w3gg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰ μὴ τῷ λογιζομένῳ τι κοινὸν εἶναι, ἐκείνῳ κοινόν	1	Paul implies here that a person should stay away from anything that he thinks is unclean. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “but if a person thinks something is unclean, then for that person it is unclean and he should stay away from it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1947	14:15	iw7w			εἰ & διὰ βρῶμα, ὁ ἀδελφός σου λυπεῖται	1	“If you hurt your fellow believer’s faith over the matter of food.” Here the word your refers to those who are strong in faith and brother refers to those who are weak in faith.
1948	14:15	ln42			ὁ ἀδελφός	1	Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian, male or female.
1949	14:15	bj8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐκέτι κατὰ ἀγάπην περιπατεῖς	1	Paul speaks of the behavior of believers as if it were a walk. Alternate translation: “then you are no longer showing love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1950	14:16	gl48			μὴ βλασφημείσθω οὖν ὑμῶν τὸ ἀγαθόν	1	Alternate translation: “If someone else thinks that something is evil, do not do it, even if you consider it to be good”
1951	14:17	j92k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ βρῶσις καὶ πόσις, ἀλλὰ δικαιοσύνη, καὶ εἰρήνη, καὶ χαρὰ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	Paul argues that God set up his kingdom so he could give us a right relationship with himself, and to provide peace and joy. Alternate translation: “For God did not set up his kingdom so that he could rule over what we eat and drink. He set up his kingdom so we could have a right relationship with him, and so he could give us peace and joy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1952	14:18	am8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δόκιμος τοῖς ἀνθρώποις	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “people will approve of him” or “people will respect him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1953	14:19	i3rv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης διώκωμεν, καὶ τὰ τῆς οἰκοδομῆς τῆς εἰς ἀλλήλους	1	Here, build up one another refers to helping each other grow in faith. Alternate translation: “let us seek to live peacefully together and help one another grow stronger in faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1954	14:20	p65h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ ἕνεκεν βρώματος, κατάλυε τὸ ἔργον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	You can make explicit the full meaning of this sentence. Alternate translation: “Do not undo what God has done for a fellow believer just because you want to eat a certain kind of food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1955	14:20	dk72		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀλλὰ κακὸν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ τῷ διὰ προσκόμματος ἐσθίοντι	1	Here a stumbling block is a food that a weaker brother eats despite thinking it is wrong, and thereby goes against his conscience. Alternate translation: “but it would be a sin for someone to eat food, which another brother thinks is wrong to eat, if by eating this causes the weaker brother to do something that is against his conscience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1956	14:21	mrr4			καλὸν τὸ μὴ φαγεῖν κρέα, μηδὲ πιεῖν οἶνον, μηδὲ ἐν ᾧ ὁ ἀδελφός σου προσκόπτει	1	Alternate translation: “It is better not to eat meat or drink wine or do anything else that might cause your brother to sin”
1957	14:21	iq9g			ὁ ἀδελφός	1	Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian, male or female.
1958	14:21	e1du		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	σου	1	Here, you is singular and stresses the responsibility of each individual believer for his fellow believer. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1959	14:22	hjk9			σὺ πίστιν ἣν ἔχεις	1	Here, faith refers back to the beliefs about food and drink.
1960	14:22	b3hi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	σὺ & σεαυτὸν	1	Here, you and yourself are singular. Because Paul is addressing the believers, you may have to translate this using plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1961	14:22	r53r			μακάριος ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτὸν ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει	1	Alternate translation: “Blessed are those who do not feel guilty for what they decide to do”
1962	14:23	s1ph		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ δὲ διακρινόμενος, ἐὰν φάγῃ, κατακέκριται	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will say that the person does wrong if he is not sure if it is right to eat a certain food, but he eats it anyway” or “The person who is not sure if it is right to eat a certain food, but then eats it anyway will have a troubled conscience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1963	14:23	yr44		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅτι οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως	1	Anything that is not from faith is something that God does not want you to do. You can make explicit the full meaning here. Alternate translation: “God will say that he is wrong because he is eating something he believes God does not want him to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1964	14:23	tr9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πᾶν δὲ ὃ οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως, ἁμαρτία ἐστίν	1	Anything that is not from faith is something that God does not want you to do. You can make explicit the full meaning here. Alternate translation: “you are sinning if you do something that you do not believe God wants you to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1965	15:intro	ae9u				0	Romans 15 General Notes Structure and formatting Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13) How to act toward God (12:1–2) How to serve the church (12:3–8) How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13) How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21) How to act toward government (13:1–7) How to act toward other people (13:8–10) Act as if the end is near (13:11–14) Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12) Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23) Be united with other Christians (15:1–13) Conclusion (15:14–16:27) Paul describes his mission (15:14–21) Paul’s travel plans (15:22–33) Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-11 and 21 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament. Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 12. In Romans 15:14, Paul begins to speak more personally. He shifts from teaching to telling of his personal plans. Important figures of speech in this chapter Strong/Weak These terms are used to refer to people who are mature and immature in their faith. Paul teaches that those who are strong in faith need to help those who are weak in faith. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
1966	15:1	cx66			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul concludes this section about believers’ living for others with reminding them how Christ lived.
1967	15:1	u19s			δὲ	1	Translate this using the words your language uses to introduce a new idea into an argument.
1968	15:1	u73x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡμεῖς, οἱ δυνατοὶ	1	Here, strong refers to the people who are strong in their faith. They believe that God allows them to eat any kind of food. Alternate translation: “we who are strong in faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1969	15:1	dx9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	This refers to Paul, his readers, and other believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1970	15:1	cv61		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῶν ἀδυνάτων	1	Here, the weak refers to the people who are weak in their faith. They believe that God does not allow them to eat some kinds of food. Alternate translation: “those who are weak in faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1971	15:2	z2k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρὸς οἰκοδομήν	1	By this, Paul means to strengthen someone’s faith. Alternate translation: “to strengthen his faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1972	15:3	y6fe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “someone wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1973	15:3	bcz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	Here Paul refers to a scripture where Christ (the Messiah) speaks to God. Alternate translation: “the Messiah said to God in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1974	15:3	qni7			οἱ ὀνειδισμοὶ τῶν ὀνειδιζόντων σε, ἐπέπεσαν ἐπ’ ἐμέ	1	The insults of those who insulted God fell on Christ.
1975	15:4	txd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅσα γὰρ προεγράφη, εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν διδασκαλίαν ἐγράφη	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For in times past, the prophets wrote everything in the Scriptures to teach us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1976	15:4	m7yy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμετέραν & ἔχωμεν	1	Paul includes his readers and other believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1977	15:4	g6r1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἵνα διὰ τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως τῶν Γραφῶν, τὴν ἐλπίδα ἔχωμεν	1	Here, have hope means that the believers will know that God will fulfill his promises. You can make explicit the full meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “In this way the scriptures will encourage us to expect that God will do for us everything that he has promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1978	15:5	u2zm			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul encourages the believers to remember that both Gentile believers and Jews that believe are made one in Christ.
1979	15:5	g5xm			Θεὸς & δῴη	1	Alternate translation: “I pray that … God … will grant”
1980	15:5	ws7q			τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν ἐν ἀλλήλοις	1	Alternate translation: “to be in agreement with each other” or “to be united”
1981	15:6	uz1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ἑνὶ στόματι, δοξάζητε	1	This means to be united in praising God. Alternate translation: “praise God together in unity as if only one mouth were speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1982	15:7	z941			προσλαμβάνεσθε ἀλλήλους	1	Alternate translation: “accept one another”
1983	15:8	gbh8			λέγω γὰρ	1	The pronoun I refers to Paul.
1984	15:8	k4my		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Χριστὸν διάκονον γεγενῆσθαι περιτομῆς	1	Here, the circumcision is a metonym that refers to the Jews. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ has been made a servant of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1985	15:8	r0gd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Χριστὸν διάκονον γεγενῆσθαι περιτομῆς	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ has become a servant of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1986	15:8	me1e			εἰς τὸ βεβαιῶσαι τὰς ἐπαγγελίας	1	This is one of the two purposes for which Christ became a servant of the circumcision.
1987	15:8	gu7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰς ἐπαγγελίας τῶν πατέρων	1	Here, the fathers refers to the ancestors of the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the promises to the ancestors of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1988	15:8	dxz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰς ἐπαγγελίας τῶν πατέρων	1	You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “the promises that God gave to the ancestors of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1989	15:9	k5q7			τὰ δὲ ἔθνη, ὑπὲρ ἐλέους δοξάσαι τὸν Θεόν	1	This is the second reason for which Christ became a servant of the circumcision. Alternate translation: “and in order that the Gentiles might glorify God for his mercy”
1990	15:9	xgc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “as someone has written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1991	15:9	em5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ ὀνόματί σου ψαλῶ	1	Here, your name is a metonym that refers to God. Alternate translation: “sing praise to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1992	15:10	yvy9			καὶ πάλιν λέγει	1	Alternate translation: “And again the scripture says”
1993	15:10	x4kg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μετὰ τοῦ λαοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	This refers to God’s people. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “with the people of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1994	15:11	xw7t			ἐπαινεσάτωσαν αὐτὸν	1	Alternate translation: “let … praise the Lord”
1995	15:12	fta5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ ῥίζα τοῦ Ἰεσσαί	1	Jesse was the physical father of King David. Alternate translation: “descendant of Jesse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1996	15:12	i4nn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπ’ αὐτῷ ἔθνη ἐλπιοῦσιν	1	Here, him refers to the descendant of Jesse, the Messiah. Those who are not Jews will also trust him to fulfill his promises. Alternate translation: “the people who are not Jews can trust him to do what he has promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1997	15:13	w7wn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πληρώσαι ὑμᾶς πάσης χαρᾶς καὶ εἰρήνης	1	Paul exaggerates here to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “may … fill you with great joy and peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1998	15:14	h98x			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul reminds the believers in Rome that God chose him to reach the Gentiles.
1999	15:14	qfs6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πέπεισμαι & ἀδελφοί μου, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐγὼ περὶ ὑμῶν	1	Paul is quite sure that the believers in Rome are honoring each other in their behavior. Alternate translation: “I myself am completely sure that you yourselves have acted toward others in a completely good way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2000	15:14	d878			ἀδελφοί	1	Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.
2001	15:14	qhv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πεπληρωμένοι πάσης γνώσεως	1	Paul exaggerates here to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “having been filled with sufficient knowledge to follow God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2002	15:14	ge2l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δυνάμενοι καὶ ἀλλήλους νουθετεῖν	1	Here, to exhort means to teach. Alternate translation: “also able to teach each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2003	15:15	n2gr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul speaks of grace as if it were a physical gift that God had given him. God had appointed Paul and apostle even though he had persecuted believers before he decided to follow Jesus. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “the grace that God gave me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2004	15:16	wiw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	γένηται ἡ προσφορὰ τῶν ἐθνῶν εὐπρόσδεκτος	1	Paul speaks of his preaching the gospel as if he, as a priest, were making an offering to God. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles might please God when they obey him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2005	15:18	lu97		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ γὰρ τολμήσω τι λαλεῖν, ὧν οὐ κατειργάσατο Χριστὸς δι’ ἐμοῦ, εἰς ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ	1	You can translate this double negative in a positive form. Alternate translation: “For the sake of the obedience of the Gentiles, I will only speak of what Christ has accomplished through me in my words and actions and by the power of signs and wonders through the power of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2006	15:18	by9s			εἰς ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν	1	Alternate translation: “so that the Gentiles will obey God”
2007	15:18	xds3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ	1	Here, word and deed refers to what Christ has accomplished through Paul. Alternate translation: “through me in my words and actions” or “the things that Christ has accomplished through what I have said and done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2008	15:19	g8bk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	σημείων καὶ τεράτων	1	These two words mean basically the same thing and refer to various kinds of miracles. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2009	15:19	c8ff			ὥστε & ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ καὶ κύκλῳ μέχρι τοῦ Ἰλλυρικοῦ	1	This is from the city of Jerusalem as far as the province of Illyricum, a region close to Italy.
2010	15:20	x9xm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὕτως δὲ φιλοτιμούμενον εὐαγγελίζεσθαι, οὐχ ὅπου ὠνομάσθη Χριστός	1	Paul only wants to preach to people who have never heard of Christ. Alternate translation: “but because of this, I want to preach the good news in places where people have never heard of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2011	15:20	kt3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἵνα μὴ ἐπ’ ἀλλότριον θεμέλιον οἰκοδομῶ	1	Paul speaks of his ministry work as if he were building a house on a foundation. Alternate translation: “in order that I might not be simply continuing the work that someone else already started. I do not want to be like a man who builds a house on someone else’s foundation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2012	15:21	rb5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	Here Paul refers to what Isaiah wrote in the scriptures. You can make the meaning explicit. Alternate translation: “what is happening is like what was written by Isaiah in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2013	15:21	wy8k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	You can translate this in an active form and make the meaning explicit. Alternate translation: “what is happening is like what Isaiah wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2014	15:21	u8d6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἷς οὐκ ἀνηγγέλη περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “Those whom no one had told the news about him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2015	15:22	f1fq			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul tells the believers in Rome about his personal plans to visit them and asks the believers to pray.
2016	15:22	ex5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ἐνεκοπτόμην	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “they also hindered me” or “people also hindered me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2017	15:23	b6kl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μηκέτι τόπον ἔχων ἐν τοῖς κλίμασι τούτοις	1	Paul implies that there are no more places in these areas where people live who have not heard about Christ. Alternate translation: “there are no more places in these regions where people have not heard about Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2018	15:24	si59		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Σπανίαν	1	At that time, Spain was a Roman province west of Rome that Paul desired to visit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2019	15:24	c6wq			διαπορευόμενος	1	Alternate translation: “as I pass through Rome” or “while I am on my way”
2020	15:24	vya3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι ἐκεῖ	1	Here Paul implies that he wants the Roman believers to provide some financial assistance to him for his journey to Spain. Alternate translation: “that you will provide for me on my journey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2021	15:24	rzie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι ἐκεῖ	1	You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “and that you will help me on my journey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2022	15:24	wg6d			ἐὰν ὑμῶν πρῶτον ἀπὸ μέρους ἐμπλησθῶ	1	Alternate translation: “after I have enjoyed spending some time with you”
2023	15:26	vn1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	εὐδόκησαν & Μακεδονία καὶ Ἀχαΐα	1	Here the words Macedonia and Achaia are synecdoches for the people who live in those areas. Alternate translation: “the believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Achaia were happy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2024	15:27	w5ap			εὐδόκησαν γάρ	1	Alternate translation: “Indeed, the believers in Macedonia and Achaia were pleased to do it”
2025	15:27	tfz1			ὀφειλέται εἰσὶν αὐτῶν	1	Alternate translation: “indeed the people of Macedonia and Achaia are in debt to the believers in Jerusalem”
2026	15:27	en7l			εἰ & τοῖς πνευματικοῖς αὐτῶν ἐκοινώνησαν τὰ ἔθνη, ὀφείλουσιν καὶ ἐν τοῖς σαρκικοῖς λειτουργῆσαι αὐτοῖς	1	Alternate translation: “since the Gentiles have shared in the spiritual things of the Jerusalem believers, the Gentiles ought to share their physical things with the Jerusalem believers”
2027	15:28	zz8u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σφραγισάμενος αὐτοῖς τὸν καρπὸν τοῦτον	1	Paul speaks of the money he is taking to Jerusalem as if it were a fruit that was collected and sealed for them. Alternate translation: “and have safely delivered this offering to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2028	15:29	ylq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας Χριστοῦ, ἐλεύσομαι	1	This phrase means that Christ will bless Paul and the Roman believers. Alternate translation: “Christ will abundantly bless us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2029	15:30	w1ta			δὲ	1	If your language has a way to show that Paul has stopped talking about the good things he is confident of (Romans 15:29) and is now starting to talk about the dangers he faces, use it here.
2030	15:30	yb7m			παρακαλῶ & ὑμᾶς	1	Alternate translation: “I encourage you”
2031	15:30	v9iy			ἀδελφοί	1	Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.
2032	15:30	fy1v			συναγωνίσασθαί	1	Alternate translation: “to work hard with” or “to struggle with”
2033	15:31	u7st		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ῥυσθῶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀπειθούντων	1	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may rescue me from those who are disobedient” or “God may keep those who are disobedient from harming me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2034	15:31	nw5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ εὐπρόσδεκτος τοῖς ἁγίοις γένηται	1	Here Paul expresses his desire that the saints in Jerusalem will gladly accept the money from the believers in Macedonia and Achaia. Alternate translation: “and pray that the believers in Jerusalem will be glad to receive the money that I am bringing them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2035	15:33	s947		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης μετὰ	1	The God of peace means the God who causes believers to have inner peace. Alternate translation: “I pray that God who causes all of us to have inner peace may be with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2036	16:intro	qy96				0	Romans 16 General Notes Structure and formatting Conclusion (15:14–16:27) Paul describes his mission (15:14–21) Paul’s travel plans (15:22–33) Paul commends Phoebe (16:1–2) Paul greets Christians in Rome (16:3–16) Paul warns against false teachers (16:17–20) Paul greets more Christians in Rome (16:21–24) Doxology (16:25–27) In this chapter, Paul gives personal greetings to some of the Christians in Rome. It was common to end a letter in the ancient Near East with this type of personal greeting. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter Because of the personal nature of this chapter, much of the context is unknown. This will make translation more difficult. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2037	16:1	sg6a			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul then greets many of the believers in Rome by name.
2038	16:1	vkg8			συνίστημι δὲ ὑμῖν Φοίβην	1	Alternate translation: “I want you to respect Phoebe”
2039	16:1	sry4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Φοίβην	1	Phoebe is a woman’s name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2040	16:1	q86q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τὴν ἀδελφὴν ἡμῶν	1	The word our refers to Paul and all believers. Alternate translation: “our sister in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2041	16:1	q669		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κενχρεαῖς	1	Cenchrea was a seaport city in Greece. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2042	16:2	cwx1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτὴν προσδέξησθε ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	Paul encourages the Roman believers to welcome Phoebe as a fellow believer. Alternate translation: “you would welcome her because we all belong to the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2043	16:2	yic3			ἀξίως τῶν ἁγίων	1	Alternate translation: “in the way that believers should welcome other believers”
2044	16:2	qp4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	παραστῆτε αὐτῇ	1	Paul encourages the Roman believers to give to Phoebe anything she needs. Alternate translation: “help her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
2045	16:2	inh1			καὶ & προστάτις πολλῶν ἐγενήθη καὶ ἐμοῦ αὐτοῦ	2	Alternate translation: “has helped many people, and she has also helped me”
2046	16:3	c5lg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πρίσκαν καὶ Ἀκύλαν	1	Priscilla was the wife of Aquila. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2047	16:3	fsk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς συνεργούς μου ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Paul’s fellow workers are people who also tell others about Jesus. Alternate translation: “who work with me to tell people about Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2048	16:5	i32d			καὶ τὴν κατ’ οἶκον αὐτῶν ἐκκλησίαν	1	Alternate translation: “and greet the believers who meet in their house to worship”
2049	16:5	bn9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἐπαίνετον	1	Epaenetus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2050	16:5	d1f1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπαρχὴ τῆς Ἀσίας εἰς Χριστόν	1	Paul speaks of Epaenetus as if he were a fruit that he harvested. Alternate translation: “first person in Asia to believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2051	16:6	ew2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μαρίαν	1	Mary is a woman’s name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2052	16:7	tzk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀνδρόνικον	1	Andronicus is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2053	16:7	z9uk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰουνίαν	1	This could refer to: (1) Junia, a woman’s name. (2) Junias, a man’s name, although this is less likely. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2054	16:7	gce3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἵτινές εἰσιν ἐπίσημοι ἐν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles know very well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2055	16:8	h976		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀμπλιᾶτον	1	Ampliatus is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2056	16:8	alh2			τὸν ἀγαπητόν μου ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	Alternate translation: “my dear friend and fellow believer in the Lord”
2057	16:9	bd5l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Οὐρβανὸν & Στάχυν	1	These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2058	16:10	k55t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀπελλῆν & Ἀριστοβούλου	1	These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2059	16:10	q96n			τὸν δόκιμον ἐν Χριστῷ	1	The word approved refers to someone who has been tested and proved to be genuine. Alternate translation: “whom Christ has approved”
2060	16:11	gt6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἡρῳδίωνα & Ναρκίσσου	1	These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2061	16:11	ket9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς ὄντας ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	This refers to those who trust in Jesus. Alternate translation: “who are believers” or “who belong to the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2062	16:12	sq9n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Τρύφαιναν & Τρυφῶσαν & Περσίδα	1	These are women’s names. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2063	16:13	zmf4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ῥοῦφον	1	Rufus is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2064	16:13	zy3x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν ἐκλεκτὸν ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord has chosen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2065	16:13	hqf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐμοῦ	1	Paul speaks of the mother of Rufus as if she were his own mother. Alternate translation: “his mother, whom I also think of as my mother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2066	16:14	dwh9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀσύγκριτον, Φλέγοντα, Ἑρμῆν, Πατροβᾶν, Ἑρμᾶν	1	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2067	16:14	ck2w			ἀδελφούς	1	Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.
2068	16:15	ye9j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Φιλόλογον & Νηρέα & Ὀλυμπᾶν	1	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2069	16:15	n2rx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰουλίαν	1	Julia is the name of a woman. She was probably the wife of Philologus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2070	16:16	g2z1			φιλήματι ἁγίῳ	1	an expression of affection for fellow believers
2071	16:16	t1q4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἀσπάζονται ὑμᾶς αἱ ἐκκλησίαι πᾶσαι τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks in a general manner concerning the churches of Christ. Alternate translation: “The believers in all the churches in this area send their greetings to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2072	16:17	u1m9			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul gives one last warning to the believers about unity and living for God.
2073	16:17	wx6r			ἀδελφοί	1	Here, brothers refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women.
2074	16:17	ztv5			σκοπεῖν	1	Alternate translation: “to watch out for”
2075	16:17	n59l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰς διχοστασίας καὶ τὰ σκάνδαλα & ποιοῦντας	1	This refers to those who argue and cause others to stop trusting in Jesus. Alternate translation: “who are causing believers to argue with one another and to stop having faith in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2076	16:17	j9x7			παρὰ τὴν διδαχὴν ἣν ὑμεῖς ἐμάθετε	1	Alternate translation: “and teaching things that do not agree with the truth you have already learned”
2077	16:17	b318		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκκλίνετε ἀπ’ αὐτῶν	1	Here, turn away is a metaphor for “refuse to listen.” Alternate translation: “do not listen to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2078	16:18	ea6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ	1	The words “they serve” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “but they serve their own stomach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2079	16:18	nxn4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ	1	Here, stomach is a metonym that refers to physical desires. Alternate translation: “but they only care about their physical desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2080	16:18	eff9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ	1	Serving there stomach represents satisfying their desires. Alternate translation: “but they only want to satisfy their own selfish desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2081	16:18	eif6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	καὶ διὰ τῆς χρηστολογίας καὶ εὐλογίας	1	The words smooth and flattering mean basically the same thing. Paul is emphasizing how these people are deceiving believers. Alternate translation: “and by saying things that seem to be good and true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2082	16:18	c2je		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐξαπατῶσι τὰς καρδίας τῶν ἀκάκων	1	Here, hearts is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner being. Alternate translation: “they deceive the innocent believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2083	16:18	m9h5			τῶν ἀκάκων	1	This refers to those who are simple, inexperienced, and naive. Alternate translation: “of those who innocently trust them” or “of those who do not know these teachers are fooling them”
2084	16:19	imc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ γὰρ ὑμῶν ὑπακοὴ, εἰς πάντας ἀφίκετο	1	Here Paul speaks of the Roman believers’ obedience as if it were a person who could go to people. Alternate translation: “For everyone has heard how you obey Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2085	16:19	le5l			ἀκεραίους & εἰς τὸ κακόν	1	Alternate translation: “not involved in doing evil things”
2086	16:20	s3cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ δὲ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης συντρίψει τὸν Σατανᾶν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας ὑμῶν ἐν τάχει	1	The phrase crush … under your feet refers to complete victory over an enemy. Here Paul speaks of the victory over Satan as if the Roman believers were trampling an enemy under their feet. Alternate translation: “Soon God will give you peace and complete victory over Satan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2087	16:21	z4g3			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul gives greetings from the believers who are with him.
2088	16:21	ku15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Λούκιος & Ἰάσων & Σωσίπατρος	1	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2089	16:22	xu3q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ἐγὼ, Τέρτιος, ὁ γράψας τὴν ἐπιστολὴν	1	Tertius is the man who wrote down what Paul spoke. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2090	16:22	nx4g			ἀσπάζομαι ὑμᾶς & ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	Alternate translation: “greet you as a fellow believer”
2091	16:23	sw7r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Γάϊος & Ἔραστος & Κούαρτος	1	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2092	16:23	j9u7			ὁ ξένος	1	This refers to Gaius, the person in whose house Paul and his fellow believers gathered for worship.
2093	16:23	m5hg			ὁ οἰκονόμος	1	This is a person who takes care of the money for a group.
2094	16:25	psm3			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Paul closes with a prayer of blessing.
2095	16:25	v71l			δὲ	1	Here the word Now marks the closing section of the letter. If you have a way of doing this in your language, you can use it here.
2096	16:25	pp5k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑμᾶς στηρίξαι	1	Paul speaks here of having strong faith as if a person were being set firmly in place. Alternate translation: “to make your faith strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2097	16:25	kmw1			κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου, καὶ τὸ κήρυγμα Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “by the good news that I have preached about Jesus Christ”
2098	16:25	s5ky		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου	1	Paul says that God has revealed previously hidden truths to the believers. He speaks of these truths as if they were a secret. Alternate translation: “because God has revealed to us believers what had been kept secret for a long time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2099	16:25	n6c1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “because God has revealed to us believers the secret that he was keeping for a long time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2100	16:26	d7r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	φανερωθέντος δὲ νῦν διά τε Γραφῶν προφητικῶν, κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως, εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη γνωρισθέντος	1	The verbs revealed and made known mean basically the same thing. Paul uses both of them to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “but now the mystery has been made known to all the nations through the prophetic writings so people can believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2101	16:26	efyy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	φανερωθέντος δὲ νῦν διά τε Γραφῶν προφητικῶν, κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως, εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη γνωρισθέντος	1	You can combine the verbs revealed and made known in an active form. Alternate translation: “but now the eternal God has made it known to all the nations through the prophetic writings so that people would believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2102	16:26	lc6d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως	1	Here, obedience and faith are abstract nouns. You can use the verbs “obey” and “trust” in your translation. Alternate translation: “so that all nations will believe and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2103	16:26	cvi3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως	1	You may need to make explicit who will obey and trust. Alternate translation: “so that all nations will obey God because they trust in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2104	16:27	qmj7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μόνῳ σοφῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ᾧ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας. ἀμήν!	1	Here, through Jesus Christ refers to what Jesus did. To give glory means to praise God. Alternate translation: “Because of what Jesus Christ has done for us, we will praise forever the one who alone is God and who alone is wise. Amen!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])